Pro WS X570-ACE - Motherboard ASUS - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL Pro WS X570-ACE ASUS

ASUS Control Center Express

User Manual

E24388

Revised Edition V6

October 2024

Copyright © 2024 ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved.

No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. ("ASUS").

ASUS provides this manual “as is” without warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties or conditions of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall ASUS, its directors, officers, employees, or agents be liable for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages (including damages for loss of profits, loss of business, loss of use or data, interruption of business and the like), even if ASUS has been advised of the possibility of such damages arising from any defect or error in this manual or product.

Specifications and information contained in this manual are furnished for informational use only, and are subject to change at any time without notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by ASUS. ASUS assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual, including the products and software described in it.

Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair, modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing.

Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the owners' benefit, without intent to infringe.

Contents

About this guide ...... xi

Chapter 1: Getting Started

1.1 Windows installation 1-2

1.1.1 Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) 1-2
1.1.2 Starting ACCE....1-8

1.2 Linux installation.... 1-9

1.2.1 Installing Docker 1-9
1.2.2 Configuring the firewall 1-17
1.2.3 Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) ...... 1-18
1.2.4 Starting ACCE....1-19
1.2.5 Accessing ACCE....1-19
1.2.6 Stopping ACCE....1-20
1.2.7 Removing a specific ACCE image 1-20

1.3 Configuration.... 1-21

1.3.1 Changing the language....1-21
1.3.2 Changing the account password....1-21
1.3.3 Activating your license key....1-22
1.3.4 Updating ACCE....1-23

Chapter 2: Main Menu

2.1 Main menu overview 2-2

2.2 Dashboard overview 2-4

2.2.1 Switching sensor views....2-5
2.2.2 Event log 2-6

2.3 Device overview 2-7

2.3.1 Filtering client devices....2-8
2.3.2 Redirecting to device information....2-10
2.3.3 Customizing device list metadata 2-10
2.3.4 Export device list....2-11
2.3.5 Creating client device groups....2-11

Contents

2.4 Shortcut functions 2-13

2.4.1 Remote control....2-14
2.4.2 OOB-Control 2-14
2.4.3 Screen broadcast....2-18
2.4.4 Security and boot settings....2-18
2.4.5 Task scheduler....2-19
2.4.6 Software management....2-19
2.4.7 Smart BIOS....2-19
2.4.8 Report generator....2-19
2.4.9 Operating status....2-19
2.4.10 Client agent updater....2-20
2.4.11 Device list....2-20
2.4.12 System restore....2-20
2.4.13 Log setting 2-20

2.5 Mission Center 2-21

2.5.1 Using the Mission Center....2-21

2.5.2 Mission Center tasks....2-22

2.6 Graphical view.... 2-23

2.6.1 Using the menu items 2-23
2.6.2 Using the client device icons....2-24
2.6.3 Switching between different layouts....2-25
2.6.4 Customizing layouts....2-25

2.7 Mailbox.... 2-29

2.7.1 Configuring mailbox notifications 2-30

2.8 QR Code 2-31

2.9 Submit Feedback 2-32

Contents

Chapter 3: Agent Deployment

3.1 Agent management overview 3-2

3.2 Prerequisites 3-4

3.2.1 General prerequisites....3-4
3.2.2 Prerequisites for Windows-based client devices....3-5
3.2.3 Prerequisites for Linux-based client devices....3-6
3.2.4 Installing SSH on a Linux-based client device 3-7
3.2.5 Additional steps for Windows 7 environments ...... 3-11

3.3 Deploying agents 3-13

3.3.1 Automatically scanning and deploying to devices......3-13
3.3.2 Scanning an IP range 3-15
3.3.3 Adding and deploying to devices 3-18
3.3.4 Editing device information....3-20
3.3.5 Installing agents manually....3-21
3.3.6 Installing agents in silent mode....3-24
3.3.7 Upgrading or repairing agents 3-26
3.3.8 Installing an agent onto the main server 3-30

3.4 Deployment troubleshooting 3-31

3.4.1 Viewing detailed error information 3-31
3.4.2 Common errors (Linux) 3-31
3.4.3 Common errors (Windows) 3-31

3.5 Updating agents.... 3-32

3.6 Removing agents 3-35

3.6.1 Removing agents through the main server 3-35
3.6.2 Removing manually installed agents on Windows......3-36

Contents

Chapter 4: Device Information

4.1 Device information overview 4-2
4.2 Device information details 4-3
4.3 Device information functions....4-4

4.3.1 Operating Status 4-5
4.3.2 Hardware Sensor (software) 4-6
4.3.3 Utilization 4-8
4.3.4 Inventory (software) 4-9
4.3.5 Software....4-11
4.3.6 Control (software) 4-13
4.3.7 Event Log (software)....4-25
4.3.8 Remote Desktop (software) 4-28
4.3.9 BIOS 4-30
4.3.10 Installer 4-39
4.3.11 Device List 4-42
4.3.12 System Restore 4-44
4.3.13 BitLocker 4-46
4.3.14 Report Generator 4-49

Contents

Chapter 5: Management Functions

5.1 OOB Control 5-2

5.1.1 Setting remote management controller credentials ..... 5-2
5.1.2 Using OOB - Control functions....5-11

5.2 Management Control Overview 5-15

5.2.1 Scanning for devices....5-15
5.2.2 Devices with multiple remote management controllers.5-16

5.3 Management Control Information....5-18

5.4 Management Control Information (DASH)....5-19

5.4.1 Hardware Sensor (DASH)....5-20
5.4.2 Inventory (DASH)....5-21
5.4.3 Control (DASH) 5-21
5.4.4 USB Redirection (DASH) 5-25
5.4.5 Network (DASH) 5-26
5.4.6 Text Redirection (DASH) 5-28
5.4.7 Account Management (DASH)....5-29
5.4.8 Role privileges (DASH) 5-30
5.4.9 Event Log (DASH) 5-33

5.5 Management Control Information (RTL8117) 5-34

5.5.1 Hardware Sensor (RTL8117)....5-35
5.5.2 Inventory (RTL8117) 5-36
5.5.3 Control (RTL8117) 5-37
5.5.4 Remote Desktop (RTL8117) 5-40
5.5.5 USB Redirection (RTL8117) 5-43
5.5.6 Smart BIOS (RTL8117)....5-44
5.5.7 Firmware Update (RTL8117) 5-48
5.5.8 Trust Zone (RTL8117) 5-49
5.5.9 Event Log (RTL8117)....5-54

Contents

5.6 Management Control Information (vPro) 5-55

5.6.1 Inventory (vPro) 5-56

5.6.2 Control (vPro)....5-59

5.6.3 Remote Desktop (vPro) 5-60

5.6.4 Storage Redirection (vPro) 5-62

5.6.5 Power (vPro) 5-65

5.6.6 Network (vPro) 5-68

5.6.7 Wake-up Alarm (vPro) 5-78

5.6.8 System Record (vPro)....5-81

5.6.9 Certificate (vPro) 5-83

5.7 Management Control Information (BMC) 5-88

5.7.1 Hardware Sensor (BMC)....5-90

5.7.2 Inventory (BMC) 5-90

5.7.3 Control (BMC) 5-91

5.7.4 Remote Desktop (BMC) 5-93

5.7.5 Smart BIOS (BMC) 5-94

5.7.6 Firmware Update (BMC) 5-99

5.7.7 Event Log (BMC) 5-100

5.7.8 IPMI (BMC) 5-100

5.7.9 IPMI Serial-over-LAN (BMC)....5-101

5.7.10 Settings (BMC)....5-102

5.7.11 Configuration (BMC) 5-118

5.7.12 FRU Information (BMC) 5-119

5.7.13 Image Redirection (BMC) 5-120

5.7.14 Platform Event Filters (BMC) 5-121

5.7.15 BSOD Capture (BMC)....5-121

5.7.16 Error Codes (BMC) 5-122

Contents

5.8 Metadata Management....5-123

5.8.1 Adding metadata fields 5-123
5.8.2 Removing metadata fields 5-125
5.8.3 Updating the metadata manually 5-126
5.8.4 Updating the metadata using a batch update .... 5-127

5.9 Software Management....5-129

5.9.1 Software Dispatch....5-129
5.9.2 Software Pool....5-133
5.9.3 Software Information....5-139
5.9.4 Software Blacklist....5-140
5.9.5 Installer 5-141
5.9.6 Software Rule Management 5-142

5.10 Task Scheduler.... 5-152

5.10.1 Task scheduler calendar overview....5-152
5.10.2 Setting a new task....5-153
5.10.3 Editing a task 5-163
5.10.4 Deleting a task 5-164

5.11 Screen Broadcast.... 5-165

5.11.1 Setting up the broadcast environment 5-167
5.11.2 Adding a new Broadcast Room 5-169
5.11.3 Managing video playlists....5-173
5.11.4 Starting or stopping a broadcast 5-174
5.11.5 Editing an existing Broadcast Room 5-175

Contents

Chapter 6: Settings

6.1 Options menu....6-2

6.1.1 SMTP settings....6-2
6.1.2 Client rule management....6-3
6.1.3 Main server rule management 6-8
6.1.4 General configuration....6-9
6.1.5 License....6-16
6.1.6 Free up system space....6-21

6.2 Account menu 6-23

6.2.1 Account Settings 6-23
6.2.2 Role privilege management 6-26
6.2.3 Login user 6-28

6.3 Backup and restore.... 6-29

6.3.1 MySQL databases (Windows) 6-29
6.3.2 SQLite databases (Windows) 6-34
6.3.3 MySQL databases (Linux) 6-37

6.4 Migrating settings from ACC CSM 6-39

6.4.1 Migrating configurations of ACC CSM server 6-39
6.4.2 Importing ACC CSM data 6-42
6.4.3 Deploying ACCE agents to ACC CSM devices 6-43

About this guide

This user guide contains the information you need when using and configuring ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE).

How this guide is organized

This guide contains the following parts:

1. Chapter 1: Getting Started

This chapter provides a quick overview of ASUS Control Center Express, and how to install and set it up.

2. Chapter 2: Main Menu

This chapter describes the functions available on the main control panel.

3. Chapter 3: Agent Deployment

This chapter describes how to automatically or manually deploy ASUS Control Center Express agents and remove agents, and updating agents.

4. Chapter 4: Device Information

This chapter describes the device information and software controlled options for managing the device.

5. Chapter 5: Management Functions

This chapter describes the metadata management, software management, task scheduler, and hardware based management functions.

6. Chapter 6: Settings

This chapter describes the User and ASUS Control Center Express settings.

Conventions

To make sure that you perform certain tasks properly, take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual.

DANGER/WARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task.

CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task.

IMPORTANT: Instructions that you MUST follow to complete a task.

NOTE: Tips and additional information to help you complete a task.

Typography

Bold text Indicates a menu or an item to select.

Italics Used to emphasize a word or a phrase.

Keys enclosed in the less-than and greater-than sign means that you must press the enclosed key.

Example: means that you must press the Enter or Return key.

++ If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are linked with a plus sign (+).

Example: ++

Command Means that you must type the command exactly as shown, then supply the required item or value enclosed in brackets.

Example: At the command prompt, type the command line: format A:/S

Reference

Visit the ASUS websites worldwide that provide updated information for all ASUS hardware and software products. Refer to the ASUS contact information for details.

Chapter 1

This chapter provides a quick overview of ASUS Control Center Express, and how to install and set it up.

Getting Starred

1.1 Windows installation

It is strongly recommended to backup your data and settings before updating ASUS Control Center Express. Refer to the Backup and Restore section of the Settings chapter for more information.

1.1.1 Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE)

1. Please visit the product website of your ASUS product to download the ASUS Control Center Express installer.
2. Unzip the installation file, then execute Setup.exe. You should be guided to install vcredist_x64, vcredist_x86, database, and ASUS Control Center Express respectively.

• Ensure that Microsoft .NET Framework V4.6.1 or higher is installed before installing ASUS Control Center Express.
• If there is an older version of ASUS Control Center Express already installed on your system and you wish to clear the original configurations of the older version, you may check the Clear original configuration option during the installation process to remove the configuration settings of the older version of ASUS Control Center Express.
• We DO NOT recommend clearing the configuration settings of older versions of ASUS Control Center Express unless necessary.

ASUS Control Center Express Setup The following components will be installed on your machine: Visual C++ "14" Runtime Libraries (x64) Visual C++ "14" 执行商程式库 (x86) Do you wish to install these components? If you choose Cancel, setup will exit. Install Cancel

ASUS Control Center Express Welcome to the ASUS Control Center Express Setup Wizard The installer will guide you through the steps required to install ASUS Control Center Express on your computer. WARNING: This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties. Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil or criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.

The illustrations in this section are for reference only and may differ between options selected. The steps in this section use MySQL as an example, if you wish to use another database, please follow the installation instructions for the database selected.

1. Select the database ( MySQL, SQLite 3) you would like to install for ASUS Control Center Express, then click Proceed. For this example, we will select MySQL.

• We recommend selecting MySQL as the database for ASUS Control Center Express.
- Before installing the database, ensure the main server is connected to a public WAN with a stable connection.

Prerequisite Select a database: ✓ MySQL (recommended) ✓ SQLite 3 Proceed Cancel

1. Read through the prerequisites, then check I Agree and click Proceed.

Prerequisite MySQL is a prerequisite for the application you want to install. By clicking on "I Agree", you will be authorizing this application to perform the following actions: 1. Check whether MySQL is installed on the system or not. 2. Download/Install MySQL via internet. □ I Agree Process Cancel

1. Select whether to download the MySQL installation files from the internet, or if you wish to use a preexisting MySQL installed on the system, then click Proceed.

Prerequisite Download MySQL (8.0.22) Use the MySQL installed on the system Version: 8.0.22 Location: C:\Program Files\MySQL\MySQL Server 8.0\ Process Cancel

• Click on Download MySQL to download the MySQL installation files. After the download is completed, a manual installation will be required.

• Click on Use the MySQL installed on the system to automatically detect a preexisting MySQL already installed.

• Once the database has been setup, the ASUS Control Center Express installation will begin.

• Select the folder you would like to install ASUS Control Center Express to; we recommend using the default folder, then click Next once you have finished.

ASUS Control Center Express Select Installation Folder The installer will install ASUS Control Center Express to the following folders. To install in this folder, click "Next". To install to a different folder, enter it below or click "Browse". Folder: C:\Program Files (x95)\ASUS\ASUS Control Center Express\ Browse... Disk Cost... Install ASUS Control Center Express for yourself, or for anyone who uses this computer: Everyone Just me < Back Next > Cancel

• Click on Browse... to select a new path to install ASUS Control Center Express.

• Click on Disc Cost... to view the server disk space and disk space required to install ASUS Control Center Express.

• Click on Next to begin the installation.

ASUS Control Center Express Confirm Installation The installer is ready to install ASUS Control Center Express on your computer. Click "Next" to start the installation. < Back Next > Cancel

1. Once in the Port Setting page, you may adjust the default set ports if your working environment is already using a port that is displayed. Once you have finished adjusting the ports or if you wish to use the default ports, click on Next.

Https Port	Main ACCE server log in port.
Connection Port	Main ACCE server and client device connection port.
Auto Deploy Port	Main ACCE server auto deploy port.
Manual Deploy Port	Main ACCE server manual deploy port.
KVM Port	Main ACCE server OOB KVM port
Broadcast Port	Main ACCE server broadcasting port.
MySQL Port	Main ACCE server database port.
Indication	Main ACCE server alert notification function port.

ASUS Control Center Express Port Setting Port Setting Https Port: 10632 Connection Port: 10633 Auto Deploy Port: 10634 Manual Deploy Port: 10635 < Back Next > Cancel

1. Select and check the options you wish to execute during the installation, then click Next.

• Launch ASUS Control Center Express after install finished: Launches ASUS Control Center Express after the installation has finished.
• Clear original configuration: (not recommended) Remove previously set data of ASUS Control Center Express. If you wish to use this option, we recommend you backup the data of your ASUS Control Center Express.
• Backup SQLite database: (recommended) Backs up any existing SQLite database during installation. The default backup location is set to C:\Program Files (x86)\ASUS\ASUS Control Center Express\apro_console\backup.

ASUS Control Center Express Please export all kinds of the data in old ASUS ACC program and then uninstall the old ASUS ACC before you start ASUS Control Center Express! Launch ASUS Control Center Express after install finished Clear original configuration Backup SQL# database < Back Next > Cancel

1. Once the installation is completed, click on Close to finish the installation.

ASUS Control Center Express Installation Complete ASUS Control Center Express has been successfully installed. Click "Close" to exit. Please use Windows Update to check for any critical updates to the .NET Framework. < Back Cancel

1.1.2 Starting ACCE

1. Launch the ASUS Control Center Express by double clicking the ASUS Control Center Express.exe application
2. Enter your Account and Password. Click Login to enter the ASUS Control Center Express main menu.

• The default account is administrator, and the default password is admin. To change the default account and password, refer to the Account Settings section of the Settings chapter.
• The account and password is case sensitive.
• ASUS Control Center Express supports nine languages (English, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Japanese, German, French, Russian, Korean, and Spanish). The display language will be set on first launch according to the operating system language. If the operating system language is not supported, the display language will default to English.
• It is strongly recommended to install a database to backup your data and settings. For more information, refer to the Backup and Restore section in the Settings chapter.

ASUS Control Center Express Welcome EXPRESS Login Account Password Login

1.2 Linux installation

• Ensure that the server is connected to the Internet.
• The following commands require elevated privileges. Ensure all commands are preceded with the sudo command.

1.2.1 Installing Docker

Compatibility issues may occur if an older version of Docker is already installed. Refer to Docker documentation at https://docs.docker.com/engine/install/ for more information.

Installing Docker in Ubuntu

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to set up the Docker apt repository:

sudo apt-get update 

sudo apt-get install ca-certificates curl gnupg 

sudo install -m 0755 -d /etc/apt/keyrings 

sudo curl -fsSL https://download.docker.com/linux/ubuntu/gpg -o /etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc 

sudo chmod a+r /etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc 

echo \
"deb [arch=(dpkg --print-architecture) signed-by=/etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc] https://download.docker.com/linux/ubuntu \(. /etc/os-release && echo "$VERSION_CODENAME") stable" | \
sudo tee /etc/apt/sources.list.d/docker.list > /dev/null 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker.

sudo apt-get update

sudo apt-get install docker-ce -y

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker

Installing Docker in Debian

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to set up the Docker apt repository:

sudo apt-get update 

sudo apt-get install ca-certificates curl gnupg 

sudo install -m 0755 -d /etc/apt/keyrings 

sudo curl -fsSL https://download.docker.com/linux/debian/gpg -o /etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc 

sudo chmod a+r /etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc 

echo \
`deb [arch=(dpkg --print-architecture) signed-by=/etc/apt/keyrings/docker.asc] https://download.docker.com/linux/debian \(. /etc/os-release && echo "$VERSION_CODENAME") stable" | \
sudo tee /etc/apt/sources.list.d/docker.list > /dev/null 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker.

sudo apt-get update 

sudo apt-get install docker-ce -y 

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker 

Installing Docker in CentOS/RHEL

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Podman is installed:

sudo podman --version 

1. If Podman is installed, run the following command to remove Podman before installing Docker:

sudo yum erase podman buildah 

Compatibility issues may occur if Podman is installed. Ensure that Podman is not installed before attempting to install Docker.

1. Run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker:

sudo yum update 

sudo yum install -y yum-utils 

sudo yum-config-manager --add-repo https://download.docker.com/linux/centos/docker-ce.repo 

sudo yum install docker-ce 

1. When prompted, enter Y to begin installation.

...
Total download size: 97 M
Installed size: 368 M
Is this ok [y/N]: 

1. When prompted, confirm that the displayed GPG key matches "060A 61C5 1B55 8A7F 742B 77AA C52F EB6B 621E 9F35", then enter Y.

...
Importing GPG key 0x621E9F35:
Userid : "Docker Release (CE rpm) <[e-mail]>"
Fingerprint: 060A 61C5 1B55 8A7F 742B 77AA C52F EB6B 621E 9F35
From : https://download.docker.com/linux/centos/gpg
Is this ok [y/N]: 

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker 

Installing Docker in Fedora

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker:

sudo dnf -y install dnf-plugins-core 

sudo dnf config-manager --add-repo https://download.docker.com/linux/fedora/docker-ce.repo 

1. When prompted, enter Y to begin installation.

...
Total download size: 93 M
Installed size: 367 M
Is this ok [y/N]: 

1. When prompted, confirm that the displayed GPG key matches "060A 61C5 1B55 8A7F 742B 77AA C52F EB6B 621E 9F35", then enter Y.

...
Importing GPG key 0x621E9F35:
Userid : "Docker Release (CE rpm) <[e-mail]>"
Fingerprint: 060A 61C5 1B55 8A7F 742B 77AA C52F EB6B 621E 9F35
From : https://download.docker.com/linux/fedora/gpg
Is this ok [y/N]: 

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker 

Installing Docker in openSUSE

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker:

sudo zypper update 

sudo zypper install docker 

sudo systemctl enable docker 

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker 

Installing Docker in Pardus

1. Start Pardus Update and ensure that all system components are up to date.
2. Open a terminal window, then run the following command to check if Docker is installed:

sudo docker version 

1. Run the following commands to download and install Docker:

sudo apt install docker.io 

sudo systemctl enable docker 

1. Run the following command to start Docker.

sudo systemctl start docker 

1.2.2 Configuring the firewall

ASUS Control Center Express uses the following default ports. Ensure that the following ports are allowed through the firewall before proceeding.

If any of the default ports are in use, adjust the port settings according to your system environment.

SNMP port	162 (default)
HTTPS port	10632 (default)
TCP port	10633 (default)
OOB KVM port	10639 (default)
Broadcast port	10640 (default)
Event alert port	10642 (default)
Proxy port	10643 (default)

Configuring the firewall in Ubuntu/Debian/Pardus

1. If Uncomplicated Firewall (ufw) is installed, open a terminal window, then run the following command to allow a port through the firewall, replacing with each of the ports listed in the default ports table:

sudo ufw allow <port> 

1. Run the following command to check the firewall status:

sudo ufw status verbose 

Configuring the firewall in CentOS/RHEL/Fedora/openSUSE

1. Run the following command to allow a port through the firewall, replacing with each of the ports listed in the default ports table:

sudo firewall-cmd --zone-public --add-port=<port>/tcp --permanent 

1. Run the following command to apply the new firewall rules:

sudo firewall-cmd --reload 

1.2.3 Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE)

1. Download the ACCE TAR archive (.tar).
2. Open a terminal window in the directory of the TAR archive.
3. Run the following command to extract the TAR archive, replacing with the filename of the TAR archive:

sudo tar -xzvf ./ "<ACCE image>.tar" 

1. Open a terminal window in the ACCE installation directory.

• The ACCE installation directory is the directory created after extracting the ACCE TAR archive.

• For example, if the TAR archive was saved in /Documents/ACCE/, the new directory created with the ACCE version number (e.g., /Documents/ACCE/1.7.7.0/) is the ACCE installation directory.

• Run the following command to start ACCE:

sudo ./ACCE --start 

1. When prompted for port settings, specify a port number or press Enter to use the default port.

Ensure that the default or specified ports are allowed through the system firewall. Refer to the Configuring the firewall section for more information.

Port settings (1~65535)
HTTPS port: Please input (or press enter to use default 10632) 

1.2.4 Starting ACCE

1. Open a terminal window in the ACCE installation directory.

The ACCE installation directory is the directory created after extracting the ACCE TAR archive. Refer to the Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) section for more information.

1. Run the following command to start ACCE:

sudo ./ACCE --start

1.2.5 Accessing ACCE

Accessing ACCE using the ExpressBrowser binary

Navigate to the ACCE installation directory, then open the AProConsole folder and double click the ExpressBrowser binary.

Accessing ACCE through a web browser

Open a web browser, then navigate to https://127.0.0.1:10632/AproUI.

• Ensure that the HTTPS port 10632 is allowed through the system firewall. Refer to the Configuring the firewall section for more information.
• If an alternate HTTPS port was specified during installation, replace 10632 with the specified HTTPS port.

1.2.6 Stopping ACCE

1. Open a terminal window in the ACCE installation directory.

The ACCE installation directory is the directory created after extracting the ACCE TAR archive. Refer to the Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) section for more information.

1. Run the following command to stop ACCE:

sudo ./ACCE --down 

1.2.7 Removing a specific ACCE image

1. Open a terminal window in the ACCE installation directory.

The ACCE installation directory is the directory created after extracting the ACCE TAR archive. Refer to the Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) section for more information.

1. Run the following command to stop ACCE:

sudo ./ACCE --down 

1. Run the following command to remove a specific ACCE image, where is the version of the ACCE image (e.g., 1.7.7.0):

sudo docker rmi acce:<version> 

1.3 Configuration

1.3.1 Changing the language

Click the 📄 in the top right menu bar, then select a language from the drop down list.

1.3.2 Changing the account password

1. Log in with the default account and password.

• The default account is administrator, and the default password is admin.
  • The account and password is case sensitive.

• Click on the icon in top right menu bar, then click on Settings.

• Click on the account to enter a new password, then click on Update to save the changes made.

Edit Account Username administrator New password e.g.****** Confirm Password e.g.****** Email e.g., [e-mail] Role Name administrator Description About this account... Active Enable the account Cancel Update

1.3.3 Activating your license key

• You must activate a license key before deploying an agent. Each client device you wish to deploy an agent to require a corresponding license key.

• Please use the Import function if you already have a list of license keys to import or a previously exported list of license keys available. For more details on License Keys please refer to the License section of the Settings chapter.

• Locate the License Key on the ASUS Control Center Express card bundled in your motherboard's giftbox.

• Click on the id then select the Options > License tab.
• Click on Add Key.

ASUS Control Center Express Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (0 / 0) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount Device license key information CSM License Information (0 / 0) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Initial Amount 0128

1. Key in the license key and then click on Add Key to register a license for a single device on ASUS Control Center Express.

Add License Key XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXX Add Key

1.3.4 Updating ACCE

• It is strongly recommended to backup your data and settings before updating ACCE. Refer to Managing data and settings in MySQL databases or Backing up data and settings in SQLite databases for more information depending on the type of database installed.
• Monitoring and management functions may be affected or unavailable if you only updated the ACCE main software, but did not update the client device agents to v1.6.3 or above. Refer to Upgrading or repairing agents in the Agent Deployment chapter to update the client agent versions.
• If you are upgrading from a previous version of ASUS Control Center Express (v1.4.x or earlier) or if you are upgrading from SQLite to MySQL, some time may be needed to convert the database. To prevent loss of data, please do not uninstall any applications or turn off the main server until the database conversion is completed. If for any reason the database conversion fails to complete, you can still continue to use ASUS Control Center Express using the existing database.
• If prompted to close ACCE services during an upgrade, click Yes to automatically close background services and continue installation.

Immediate update

You can immediately update your ASUS Control Center Express from the Update Settings tab under Options.

1. Click on located at the top right menu bar, then select General Configuration, then scroll to Update Settings. Options >
2. Click on Check next to the Immediate update field, then click OK.

Banner logo Do you want to check for updates? Debug mode OK Cancel Update Settings Immediate update Check

1. If a new update is available, a pop up notification will appear notifying you of a new update available for ASUS Control Center Express. Click Install on the pop up notification to install the new update, or click Cancel to cancel the update.

Control Center Express Updater A new update is available. Do you want to install? Install Cancel

1. Click on Install to begin the update. ASUS Control Center Express will automatically close when the update is ongoing, ensure to launch ASUS Control Center Express again after the update is completed.

Control Center Express Updater A new update is available. Do you want to install? Install Cancel

1. Click on OK once the update has been successfully completed.

Control Center Express Updater Update has been successfully completed OK

Automatic updates

Enable the Automatic updates function to receive a new update pop up notification on the bottom right of your ASUS Control Center Express window. You can choose whether to install or cancel the update from this pop up window.

1. Click on located at the top right menu bar, then select Options > General Configuration, then scroll to Update Settings.

2. Select how often to check for updates and prompt update notifications from the Automatic updates drop down menu.

Update Settings Immediate update Automatic updates Mailbox notification Update all clients 1 Hour Disable 1 Hour 12 Hours 24 Hours 48 Hours 1 Week Check

1. When a new update is available, the pop up notification will appear in the bottom right corner of the ASUS Control Center Express window. You can do one of the following actions when the notification appears:

- Click on Install to immediately download and begin updating.

- Clickon Select to select a different time to prompt you with the update notification.

- (not recommended) Click on Cancel if you do not wish to update ASUS Control Center Express. If you select this option, the update notification will appear again the next time the selected notification time for Automatic updates is reached.

Control Center Express Updater A new update is available. Do you want to install? Install Select Cancel

Manual update

1. Download the latest version of the ASUS Control Center Express installation file from the product website of your ASUS product.
2. Unzip the installation file, then refer to the Installing ASUS Control Center Express (ACCE) section to update the ASUS Control Center Express main software on the main server.
3. Once the ASUS Control Center Express main software update on the main server is completed, please refer to Client Agent Updater or Upgrading or repairing agents in the Agent Deployment chapter to update the agents on the client device(s).

Chapter 2

This chapter describes the functions available on the main control panel.

Main Menu

2.1 Main menu overview

You can toggle between Classic and Graphical views by clicking on

A brief overview of both views of ASUS Control Center Express is displayed as below:

The screenshots in this section are for reference only.

Classic view

Dashboard Main control panel menu bar ASUS® Connection (10) 150 Hardware Server 145 Utilization 145 Event Log 145 Device View - Version Close Unapp Select function Connection 1 Also Logan Case OS Information P Address HP Address Utilization Model Name BOD Version BOD Release Date Online DESKTOP-300R007 NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.14 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-80N8USS NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.18 Optical Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-305I10GP NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.13 Critical Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-HU8DGP NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.1 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-Z448E6B NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.2 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-Z7448BA NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.26 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-Z446F5B NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.3 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-Z783DGANA Win100(A) 192.168.0.4 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-B839CFONA Win100(A) 192.168.0.5 Normal Normal Pro WIS XSTO-ACE 2007 04/04/2020Online DESKTOP-A4801A7NA Win100(A) 192.168.0.181NormalNormalPro WIS XSTO-ACE 200704/04/2020Online DESKTOP-S596C7BNAWin100(A) 192.168.0.195NormalNormalPro WIS XSTO-ACE 200704/04/2020Online DESKTOP-C355AABNAWin100(A) 192.168.0.79NormalNormalPro WIS XSTO-ACE200704/04/2020Online DESKTOP-B84FTENAWin100(A) 192.168.0.193NormalNormalPro WIS XSTO-ACE200704/04/2020Device overview Mission center

Graphical view

Main control panel menu bar ASUS Dissection 150 Hardware Time 163 Infineless 165 Board Log 100.000.00 on-range order on-axis download Dashboard Device overview Mission center

Menu bar items:

The menu bar on the top of the screen has the following menu items:

Top menu bar items Description
	Switch view	Switches user interface.
	Report generator	Generates graphs and reports of the online/offline status of client devices, and also generates lists and reports of software installation and hardware.
	Management control*	Check device hardware and execute functions using the remote management controller, for devices that are powered off, devices that have no OS installed, or devices where you cannot enter the OS.
	Metadata	Customize device metadata on a single or multiple devices.
	Deploy	Automatically or manually deploy or remove ASUS Control Center Express agents
	Settings	Configure SMTP Server setting, notification rules, ASUS Control Center Express main server settings, License key management, and data transfer.
	Language	Select the language for ASUS Control Center Express
	Account	Add and edit accounts, and permission settings.Scan QR code.Logout.
	Mailbox	Read notifications related to ASUS Control Center Express

* To use the Management Control function, ensure that the motherboard you wish to control supports remote management controllers.

2.2 Dashboard overview

The Dashboard Overview allows you to view activity alerts and event logs to monitor client devices in real time.

ASUS Connection (24) 150 Hardware Server 145 Utilization 145 Event Log 2008 WISV X37V-ACE WIS VAS22 DISKTOP 100.00% P/ Department Server System Office 2008 WISV X37V-ACE WIS VAS22 DISKTOP 100.00% P/ Department Server network-Shubuk MCP (B) Family Controller under Working/ Virtual Hardware 2008 WISV X37V-ACE WIS VAS22 DISKTOP 100.00% P/ Department Server network-Shubuk MCP (B) System Controller under Working/ Virtual Hardware 2008 WISV X37V-ACE WIS VAS22 DISKTOP 100.00% P/ Department Server network-Shubuk MCP (B) System Controller under Working/ Virtual Hardware 2008 WISV X37V-ACE WIS VAS22 DISKTOP 100.00% P/ Department Server network-Shubuki MCP (B) System Controller under Working/ Virtual Hardware Price Scaled to Switch... Close Group Select Function Connection: Atlas Light User OS Information IP Address HIT Server USB Station Model Manager MACS Version MACS Remover Help Online DESKTOP-SSRDSZ7 N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.14 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-SSNRS5 N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.18 Critical Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-SCS13DXP N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.13 Critical Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-HGUSBQF N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.1 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-ZHESFBS N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.2 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-ZYFDBA N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.28 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-ZHREFBS N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.3 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-ZTIN5D8 N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.4 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-BDSDFC N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.6 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-AAMO1A7 N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.191 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-DNDCN N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.199 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-KARDAJ6 N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.79 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020 Online DESKTOP-KRDFBE N/A Win10(54) 192.168.0.197 Normal Normal Pro WS X37V-ACE 2007 04/04/2020

Connection

This graph displays a summary of the connection status of all client devices.

Color Status
Green Online
Blue Maintenance
Yellow Standby
Red Offline

Utilization

This graph displays a summary of the utilization status of all online client devices.

Color Status
Red Critical
Yellow Warning
Blue Normal

Hardware Sensor

This graph shows a summary of the hardware status of all online client devices.

Color Status
Red Critical
Yellow Warning
Blue Normal

2.2.1 Switching sensor views

You can customize the information shown on the Connection, Hardware Sensor, and Utilization graphs by clicking on a color block on the graph or using the graph keys to filter devices which match the selected status. For example, on the Connection graph, you can choose to show or hide devices that are Online, under Maintenance, in Standby, or Offline.

You can also click on the top right corner of each graph to switch between pie graph and bar graph views.

Connection Online 1 Maintain 1 Standby 1 Offline 1

2.2.2 Event log

The Event Log displays the status of all client devices in real time, allowing you to keep track of the status changes of your client devices at a quick glance. You can also click on the top right corner of the Event Log block to expand the Event Log to view a detailed list of the event items.

Event Log Monitor IP Address Alias Date & Time Level Type Message 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 16:01:02 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 16:30:52 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 16:00:42 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 16:30:12 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:59:52 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:39:12 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:30:52 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:58:12 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:57:52 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:57:12 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:38:37 critical voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.168.0.18 Server1 - WS X570 ACE 2020/08/26 15:36:12 normal voltage-CPU Core Voltage under Warning/Critical threshold

Use the Notification Rule Management menu to manage which events are shown in the Event Log. To set up notification rules, please click 📋 in the top right menu bar of the Dashboard, then select Options > Rule Management. For more information, please refer to the Rule Management section of the Settings chapter.

Clicking on a client device IP address on the Event Log will highlight the selected device in the Devices list, helping you quickly locate devices which require immediate attention.

2.3 Device overview

The Device overview lists all your client devices and also allows you to search for client devices using keywords, export the list of client devices, or perform actions on selected client devices using the function shortcut.

• Certain fields may show a value of "Not Config" if they have not yet been configured using ASUS Control Center Express.
• If a Windows-based client device is powered off, offline, or logged out, the Logon User field will show the username of the last logged in user enclosed in brackets ("[]").

ASUS Control Center Express ASUS Connection (∞) 5 Hardware Sensor 5 Utilization 5 Event Log 82.16K 1.03 LAB0078-8MC no switch under Warning/Offshore/Thermal 82.16K 1.03 LAB0078-8MC no switch over the Warning threshold 82.16K 1.03 LAB0078-8MC no switch over the Warning threshold Search bar Press Enter to search... Clear demo Select function Devices list Connection Alias Login User OS Information IP Address HW Sensor Utilization Fail Status Online LAB0078-vPro LAB-DEV-0070 Win10(84) 192.168.1.163 Normal Warning Not Config Online LAB0077-Dash LAB-SUP-0077 Win11(64) 192.168.1.161 Normal Warning Not Config Online LAB0100-BWC LAB-USR-0100 Win11(64) 192.168.1.162 Normal Warning Not Config Online LAB0059-BWC LAB-DEV-0259 Win10(54) 192.168.1.153 Normal Warning Not Config Online DESKTCP-STJTPJK [Administrator] Win10(54) 192.168.0.53 Critical Warning Not Config

2.3.1 Filtering client devices

To clear the filter and view all devices, click on Clear in the Search bar.

• To filter devices using the Search bar:

Enter a keyword into the Search bar then press to search for devices with details matching the search criteria. If you wish to remove a keyword, click on the X.

• To filter devices using the Dashboard:

On the Connection, Hardware Sensor, or Utilization overview, click on a color block on the graph or use the graph keys to filter devices which match the selected status.

• To filter the devices using Devices list:

1. Hover over the column you wish to use as your filter criteria in the Devices list.

2. Clickon, then select the filter rule (

Equals, Not equal, Starts with, Ends with, Contains, Not contains) and enter the keyword to search.

• Click on the name of a column header to sort the filter results alphabetically, in ascending or descending order.
• Click on the expand icon in the top right corner of the Devices overview block to expand the client device list; clicking on the expand icon again will revert the list back to its original size.
• Click and drag on a column title rearrange the columns of the Devices list.

• To filter the devices using Group:

To clear the filter and view all devices, click on (No Filter Needed) in the Group drop down menu.

Click Group, then select a group from the drop down menu to only display the devices in that group.

ASUS Convention Hardware Server Utilization Event Log IT Department Select function Connection Alias CTS Information IP Business HW Service Utilization Online Server2 - WS X070/ACE Win0(84) 192.168.0.13 Normal Normal Normal Online Server1 - WS X070/ACE Win0(84) 192.168.0.13 Critical Normal Normal Online Server3 - WS X070/ACE Win0(84) 192.168.0.13 Critical Normal Normal RECIT Mechanical Code Login User Customer Service Department IE Department CSC Department R & V Department New group (No Filter Wizard) 64/26/2019 N/S 64/12/2019 89/S 64/24/2020 89/S

2.3.2 Redirecting to device information

You can view the device information of a device by clicking on a cell for a client device in the device overview list. You can view more detailed information on the client device, or operate different functions available for the client device on the device information page.

For more information on the device information page, please refer to the Device Information chapter.

2.3.3 Customizing device list metadata

Click on the Customize icon to select which items to display in the client device list, you can also display newly added metadata columns to the device overview list by checking the new metadata item.

Customize Connection Alias Host Name Logon User OS Information IP Address HW Sensor Utilization Model Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date WatchDog Registry Editor USB Storage Device Agent Version M.C Save

2.3.4 Export device list

You can export the device list to a .csv file for when you need to backup the devices list.

To Export the device list, click on 📁 (Export), then enter your file name and click Save to save the device list as a .csv file.

2.3.5 Creating client device groups

Group client devices on the client device list into groups according to your needs. Using the group function and filter function, you can quickly locate, view, and manage client devices. You can also apply notification rule settings to these groups, or easily add devices which appear on reports from the Report generator to existing groups.

To create a new device group:

1. Click on Group.
2. Select New group from the drop down menu.

ASUS Connecticut Hardware Sensor Utilization Smart Log New group ( No filter needed ) 04/28/2019 N/A 04/12/2019 USB 04/24/2020 USB

1. Enter a name for the group, then click Save.

Please enter the name of the new group Save Cancel

1. Select the devices you wish to add to the group, then click Group and click +.

• Click on to remove the selected devices from the group.

• Click on to delete the group.

• Click Yes on the confirmation window, then click OK to finish adding devices to a group.

2.4 Shortcut functions

You can perform certain actions or schedule tasks on selected client devices.

- Certain functions may require you to restart the client device for the changes to take effect.

- Certain functions are only supported on Windows-based client devices.

1. Tick the checkbox for the device(s) you would like to perform an action on.

ASUS Control Center Express ASUS Connection (10) 56 Hardware Sensor 1 Utilization 1 Event Log H2.168.3.13 RAD Server System Firmware progress: DMM Missing or Not Functional H2.168.3.13 RAD Server System Firmware progress: Starting operating system boot process Press "Enter to search... Clear Group Select function Connection Alias Login User OS Information HW Sensor IP Address Utilization More Offline DESKTOP-83AB42D N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.69 Normal Pro Offline DESKTOP-075A245 N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.224 Normal Pro Offline DESKTOP-48DE563 N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.142 Normal Pro Offline DESKTOP-3ECEB65 N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.137 Normal Pro Offline DESKTOP-20DE43B N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.190 Normal Pro Offline DESKTOP-7008770 N/A Win10(64) Normal 192.168.0.55 Normal Pro

1. Click on Select function, and select the function you would like to use. Please refer to the table on the next page for a brief summary of each function.

ASUS Control Center Express Connection (##) 56 Hardware Sensor 1 Utilization 1 Remote Control OCB - Control Screen Broadcast Security Task Scheduler Software Management Smart BIOS Report Generator Operating Status Client Agent Updater Device Manager Process 'Enter' to search... Clear Group Connection Alias Login User OS Information HIV Set Offline DESKTOP-83AB420 N/A Win10(64) Normal Offline DESKTOP-075A245 N/A Win10(64) Normal Offline DESKTOP-48DE563 N/A Win10(64) Normal

1. Use the Mission Center to check if the task was completed successfully. Refer to the Mission Center section for more information.

2.4.1 Remote control

Restart computer	Restart the selected device(s).
Power off	Power off the selected device(s).
Power on	Power on the selected device(s).* A powered off client device can only be powered on if it supports Wake-on-LAN

2.4.2 OOB-Control

• Only available on client devices connected using a management LAN port with motherboards which support remote management controllers.
• The OOB-Control menu includes functions from the 4 remote management controllers: BMC, DASH, RTL8117, and vPro. If a selected device does not support a selected function, you can view related information in the mission center after executing the function.

- Power control

Power On (G0/S0)	Power on the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Off - Hard (G3)	Force a power off of the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Set the selected device(s) to restart after shutting down the OS through the remote management controller.
Sleep - Deep (G1/S3)	Set the selected device(s) to enter sleep mode (G1/S3) through the remote management controller.
Master Bus Reset	Reset the hardware of the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Hibernate (G1/S4)	Set the selected device(s) to enter hibernate mode (G1/S4) through the remote management controller.
Restart Computer to BIOS	Set the selected device(s) to enter BIOS after a restart through the remote management controller.
Power On to BIOS	Set the selected device(s) to enter BIOS after powering on through the remote management controller.
Restart Computer to IDE-R Floppy	Set the selected device(s) to enter IDE-R floppy drive after a restart through the remote management controller.
Power On to IDE-R Floppy	Set the selected device(s) to enter IDE-R floppy drive after powering on through the remote management controller.

• Power control (continued)

Restart Computer to IDE-R CDROM	Set the selected device(s) to enter IDE-R ODD after a restart through the remote management controller.
Power On to IDE-R CDROM	Set the selected device(s) to enter IDE-R ODD after powering on through the remote management controller.
Sleep - Light (G1/S2)	Set the selected device(s) to enter sleep mode (G1/S2) through the remote management controller.
Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	Power off and restart the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Diagnostic Interrupt (NMI)	Set the selected device(s) to print error report and restarting through the remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS of the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Off - Hard Graceful (G3)	Normal shut down via the hardware of the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Master Bus Reset Graceful	Normal shut down and resetting the hardware of the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Cycle (Graceful Soft Off) (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS then restarting the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
Power Cycle (Graceful Hard Off) (G3)	Normal shut down via the hardware then restarting the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.

- Watchdog

Watchdog Enable	Enable RTL8117 Watchdog monitoring for selected device(s).
Watchdog Disable	Disable RTL8117 Watchdog monitoring for selected device(s).

- BIOS

Clear CMOS

Clear CMOS for selected device(s) through RTL8117 or BMC to reset them to factory settings.

• Account management

Set password	Set the remote management controller account password for selected RTL8117 or vPro device(s).
Login	Log into the remote management controller account of selected BMC or DASH device(s).
Change default password	Change the default password for selected BMC device(s).* Only applicable for BMC devices that have not had a password set yet

- System

Restart service	Restart the RTL8117 service on selected device(s).
Sync OEM port	Synchronize the BMC port for selected device(s).

• KVM

KVM Remote Multi-display	Set RTL8117 KVM of selected device(s) as remote Multi-display.
KVM Local Multi-display	Set RTL8117 KVM of selected device(s) as local Multi-display.
KVM Remote Single-display	Set RTL8117 KVM of selected device(s) as remote single-display.
KVM Enable	Enable KVM for selected RTL8117 and vPro machine(s).
KVM Disable	Disable KVM for selected vPro machine(s).
KVM Password	Set the vPro KVM password for selected device(s).

- USB redirection

USB Redirection	Configure USB redirection of selected device(s) through the client device's remote management controller.
Enable USB Redirection	Enable USB redirection for selected device(s).
Disable USB Redirection	Disable USB redirection for selected device(s).

- Firmware update

Firmware Update

Update the RTL8117 or BMC firmware of selected device(s).* Firmware update will be disabled if KVM is enabled

- Trust zone

Trust Zone

Set the main server IP addresses which are allowed to perform RTL8117 function operations on client devices.

• Certificate management

Certificate Management

Manage the vPro certificates for selected device(s).

- System trap alert

Enable Trap Alert	Enable the DASH and vPro system trap alert on selected device(s).
Enable Trap Alert - Info	Set the DASH and vPro system trap alert as information level on selected device(s).
Enable Trap Alert - Warning	Set the DASH and vPro system trap alert as warning level on selected device(s).
Enable Trap Alert - Error	Set the DASH and vPro system trap alert as error level on selected device(s).
Disable Trap Alert	Disable the DASH and vPro system trap alert on selected device(s).

• IPMI

IPMI Tool Lanplus Command Redirect	Configure command redirection on selected BMC device(s).
FRU Info. Write	Write information from the FRU to the BMC device(s).

- Settings

Settings

Configure settings for selected BMC device(s).

- OOB - Control Help

OOB - Control Help

View descriptions of supported OOB control functions.

2.4.3 Screen broadcast

Create a broadcast room Create a broadcast room and broadcast to selected device(s).

2.4.4 Security and boot settings

If the below settings have not previously been configured using ASUS Control Center Express, the default value of "Not config" will be displayed.

Enable Regedit*	Enable/disable Windows Registry Editor on selected device(s).
Disable Regedit*
Enable USB	Enable/disable USB ports on selected device(s).
Disable USB
USB Read Only	Set the USB ports to read only on selected device(s).
Fast Startup Enable*	Enable/disable fast startup on selected device(s).
Fast Startup Disable*
Enable Windows Update*	Enable/disable Windows Update on selected device(s).
Disable Windows Update*
Enable All Removable	Enable/disable all types of removable media on selected device(s).
Disable All Removable
Enable USB Drive	Enable/disable USB drives on selected device(s).
Disable USB Drive
USB Drive Read Only	Set USB drives to read only on selected device(s).
Enable CD-ROM	Enable/disable optical disc drives on selected device(s).
Disable CD-ROM
CD-ROM Read Only	Set optical disc drives to read only on selected device(s).

* Only supported on Windows-based client devices.

2.4.5 Task scheduler

Task Scheduler Schedule tasks for selected device(s).

2.4.6 Software management

Software Dispatch	Dispatch software and scripts to device(s).
Software Information	View or configure applications, processes or services on device(s).
Software Blacklist*	View or add blacklisted software for device(s).
Installer**	Download or update the driver, utility applications, and BIOS for device(s).
Software Rule Management*	Set rules for software blacklist and whitelist, as well as the email receiver for the notifications.

* Only supported on Windows-based client devices.
** Only BIOS updates are supported on Linux-based client devices.

2.4.7 Smart BIOS

BIOS	Upload, update or flash the BIOS of the selected device(s)
Enable BIOS settings	Enable the BIOS settings of client devices.

2.4.8 Report generator

Connection	Generate a report and analysis on connection status (online / offline) of client devices.
Software	Generate a report and list of software installations and permissions.
Hardware	Generate a report and list of client device’s hardware.

2.4.9 Operating status

Maintenance	Set the operating status of device(s) to maintenance.
Standby	Set the operating status of device(s) to standby.
Normal	Set the operating status of device(s) to normal.

2.4.10 Client agent updater

Client Agent Updater Update selected device's agent.

2.4.11 Device list

Device List View the system components for selected device(s).

Quick Create	Create a system restore point for the selected device(s).
System Restore Point	Restore the selected device(s) from a system restore point.

2.4.13 Log setting

Agent log level	Set the log level of the selected device(s) to Info, Warning, or Error.
Fetch	Retrieve event logs from the selected device(s).

Retrieved logs will be saved to the following locations on the ACCE server:

• Windows: C:\ProgramData\APro\Log\APRO
  • Linux: /etc/APRODATA/APRO/LOG/ClientLog

2.5 Mission Center

The Mission Center allows you to view the progress and status of tasks. Tasks that are still pending, finished tasks, and ongoing tasks can all be viewed in the Mission Center as well as the progress and execution results of the tasks.

2.5.1 Using the Mission Center

- Reposition the Mission Center:

Click and drag the Mission Center icon to move it to another location.

• Viewing finished/total amount of tasks:

View the number finished tasks (left number) and the total number of tasks (right number) from a quick glance on the Mission Center icon.

- Expanding / minimizing the Mission Center:

You can click the Mission Center icon to expand the Mission Center and view the progress and starting time of the tasks; clicking on the Mission Center icon again will minimize the expanded window.

• Viewing task information:

Clicking on a task name in the expanded view of the Mission Center will allow you to view the client devices the task is being performed on as well as the status or results for each client device.

USB Read Only IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Mes 192.168.0.14 DESKTOP-3SR3R27 Success 192.168.0.18 DESKTOP-82N6U55 Success 192.168.0.13 DESKTOP-SG51DEP Success OK

- Failed tasks:

A failed task will be marked in red in the Mission Center. You can click on the task name to view more details on the failed task.

Mission Center Enable USB 2 minutes ago Power Off a few seconds ago Normal Pro WS X570-A... 120 2 / 2 Normal Pro WS X570-A... 12

2.5.2 Mission Center tasks

• Click on the X next to the task progress bar to delete a completed task. Only completed tasks can be deleted, tasks that are still pending and ongoing tasks cannot be deleted until they are completed.
• Tasks that are split up into steps can also be completed through the Mission Center. For example a task that restarts the client device after BIOS update; you can restart the client device through the Mission Center once the BIOS update step has been completed.
• The Mission Center will record current ongoing tasks on the ASUS Control Center Express main server, if the ASUS Control Center Express main server is closed and restarted, the mission center's tasks will be reset and only record the ongoing tasks once the ASUS Control Center Express main server has restarted.

2.6 Graphical view

You can toggle between the Classic view or Graphical view. The Graphical view allows you to upload a layout image (such as the office floor) and place shortcut icons of client devices onto their respective places on the layout.

2.6.1 Using the menu items

Please refer to the table below for the different functions available on the Graphical view.

ASUS Connection Presn: Order to search Clear Select function (10) 32 If important Hardware Sensor Utilization

	Check all machines Select all client devices on the layout
	Uncheck all machines Deselect all client devices on the layout
	Edit Edit the shortcut icons and background, please refer to theCustomizing layoutssection for more information.
	Zoom In Zoom in on the layout area
	Zoom Out Zoom out on the layout area

2.6.2 Using the client device icons

• Hover over client device icon:

Hover over a client device icon to view the details of the client. You may customize the information shown by clicking on ☐ (Customize) and checking or unchecking the metadata item you wish to display or hide, then click on Save.

- Single click on client device icon:

A single click on the client device icon will select the icon, for when you wish to use a function on a client device or multiple devices. To deselect the icon, click on the client device icon again.

For more details on the functions, please refer to the Device Information and Management Functions chapters.

- Double click on client device icon:

Double clicking on a client device icon will redirect you to the Device information screen.

For more information on the Device Information screen, please refer to the Device Information chapter.

- Client device icon status:

The client device icon will change or change colors depending on the status.

Unchecked Checked Status
		Offline
		Device online, hardware sensor and utilization status in normal state
		Device online, hardware sensor and utilization status in warning state
		Device online, hardware sensor and utilization status in critical state

2.6.3 Switching between different layouts

Select a layout from the drop-down menu to switch to the selected a layout.

Plot, Tater to view Close Select Function Setpoint 1/1

2.6.4 Customizing layouts

Adding a new layout

1. Click Edit.

Play Edit to Insert Clear Select Function Equinox

1. Click Add Layout.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Return Description None else in a description Save Delete Layout (NO.31) DESKTOP-HELANS(192.160.0.103) Add Client Reset Client Icon Size 40

1. Click Browse to select an image file to use as the layout background, then enter a description (optional).

If a description is not specified, the current filename and datestamp will be used by default.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Remove Description Remove User's View/Show Add Delete Layout [NO:31] DESKTOP-HFLAR$(192.168.0.103) Add Client Reset Client Icon Size: 40

1. Select a client device from the drop-down list to add a new device icon, then click and drag the device icon to move it to the desired location on the layout.

Click Reset Client to remove the device icon.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Form enter a description Save Delete Layout (NO 31) DESKTOP-HFL.AAMB[192.168.0.103] Add Client Reset Client Issue State 4D

1. Click and drag the icon size scroll bar to adjust the size of the device icon (optional).

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Save Delete Layout (NO-31) DESKTOP-MPLAMB(192.168.0.103) Icon Size: 40 Add Client Reset Client

1. Click Save.

Edit Layout Select Layout If department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Paste to a description Save Delete Layout

Editing a layout

1. Click Edit.

Phase-Enter to search Close Select functions Options Set Function

2. Select a layout from the drop-down list, then edit the layout as required.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Private enter a description Save Delete Layout IND 310 DESKTOP-NFLAMR(192.160.5.18) Add Client Reset Client Icon Size 40

3. Click Save.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Create main a description Save Delete Layout [NO:31] DESKTOP-HFLA0YB(192.160.0.103) Add Client Reset Client Icon Size 40

Deleting a layout

1. Click Edit.

Phase-Enter to search Insert Select Function

2. Select a layout from the drop-down list.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Show note a description Save Delete Layout [NO 31] DESKTOP-NFLAMB192.160(0.107) Add Claver Reset Claver Icon Size 40

3. Click Delete Layout.

Edit Layout Select Layout IT department Add Layout Select layout background Browse Description Save Delete Layout [NO:31] DESKTOP-HFL.ASW(192.160.0.10.1) Add Client Reset Client Icon Size 40

2.7 Mailbox

You can read important information and the latest updates on ASUS Control Center Express, such as the latest update released, update notifications, operation precautions, or introductions for new functions from the Mailbox.

To view the items in Mailbox, click on located at the top right menu bar.

ASUS Connection (●) 54 Hardware Sensor 1 Utilization 1 Event Log New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video New Textural Video Press Date to start... Close Group Select Function Connector Alias Login User OS Information. IP Address HIV Sensor Utilization Model Name: BIOS Version: BIOS Release Date: Maintain: DESKTOP-JH09F88 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.2 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Maintain: DESKTOP-T1F496A N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.20 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-JH09F88 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.3 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-ZT365D6 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.4 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-RG09CFC N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.5 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-AA8NIA7 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.191 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-GS09C7B N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.106 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-ESB2A66 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.79 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-ESB5F7E N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.190 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-ESB5EC63 N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.118 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE 1301 2018/13/02 Office: DESKTOP-FIDAPFOG N/A Wm10(84) 182.998.0.96 Normal Normal Pro WIS 3070-ACE

Unread All Information Sharing New Tutorial Video Information Sharing New Tutorial Video New Tutorial Video Notice: Important update New Version 1.6

New Version 1.6 The latest version 1.6 of ASUS Control Center Express has been released. You can download from the official website and upgrade it. Experience the new features and bring you more convenient and efficient management services. https://www.asus.com/campaign/ASUS Control Center Express global/ *Note: Please perform the client agent update of the client machines after the ASUS Control Center Express main program of the console server is upgraded. OK

Unread	Click to view all unread messages. Clicking on a message will allow you to view the message in detail.
All	Click to view all messages. Clicking on a message will allow you to view the message in detail.

Unread messages will be marked with a yellow dot, once the message is read, the yellow dot will disappear, and the message will be removed from the Unread tab the next time you access the Mailbox.

2.7.1 Configuring mailbox notifications

1. Click on located at the top right menu bar, then select General Configuration, then scroll to Update Settings. Options >

2. Select how often to check for new notifications or messages and prompt mail notifications from the Mailbox notification drop down menu.

Update Settings Immediate update Automatic updates 1 Hour Mailbox notification 12 Hours Disable 1 Hour 12 Hours 24 Hours 48 Hours 1 Week Update all clients Installer Settings

2.8 QR Code

You can scan the QR code to quickly access the web version of ASUS Control Center Express on your mobile device.

To access QR Code, click on 🔒 located at the top right menu bar, then select QR Code.

• The mobile device you used to scan the QR code needs to be connected to the main server's IP address.
• If the main server's network environment is a domain or a personal network, you will need to ensure your mobile device can connect to the main server (through a WiFi router or VPN) before scanning the QR code.
• If the main server's network environment includes a public network, please switch to the public network's QR code by clicking on the drop down menu before scanning the QR code.

Ethernet (192.168.0.14)

2.9 Submit Feedback

You can provide feedback to the developers using the Feedback function. You may also upload screenshots if required.

To submit feedback, click on 🔒 located at the top right menu bar, then select Feedback.

Feedback Feedback Needs improvement Satisfied Software name Email E-mail address (optional) Type Suggestion Tell us why? Upload screenshot Screenshot file (optional) Browse Seed

Chapter 3

This chapter describes how to automatically or manually deploy ASUS Control Center Express agents and remove agents, and updating agents.

Agennt Deputyment

3.1 Agent management overview

The Agent Management menu allows you to manage ASUS Control Center Express agents, such as automatic or manual agent installation or removal.

To access Agent Management, click on 📁 located at the top right menu bar.

Main window

Agent Management Scan results No Row to Shoe Deploy Re-Display Remove the client client's ACC agent No Row to Shoe Deploy list

Scan results	This list shows possible devices that the agent can be deployed to.
Deploy List	This list shows the deployment results for each device.
Add	Add a single device to deploy an agent to.
Scan	Automatically scan all client devices in the same subnet as the Main server available for agent deployment
IP Range	Scan an IP Range entered that you wish to scan.
Remove	Remove client device(s) that you do not wish to deploy agent(s) to.
Import	Import an already exported device list (.csv file).
Export	Export the current device list of devices added or scanned to a .csv file.
Existing Clients	Display all client device(s) that already have agents deployed.
Manual Installation	Download the agent installation file, then manually install the agent on the client device, or install the agent in silent mode.
Deploy	Automatically deploys the agent to the selected client device(s) .
Re-Deploy	Repairs the agent on client device(s) which already have agents installed.
Remove the client device's ACC agent	If an ACC CSM agent is already installed on a client device, checking this option will automatically remove the ACC CSM agent when deploying an ASUS Control Center Express agent.

Add/Edit Target Host window

Edit Target Host Main Server 192.168.0.103 OS type Windows Linux Host Type IP Address Host Name 192.168.0.105 Host Port 22 Account Type Local Account accce Password **** Remote desktop port 10637 Save Cancel

Main Server	Enter the IP of the ASUS Control Center Express server
OS Type	Select the OS type of the client
Host Type	Select either IP address or host nameIP address: IP address of the clientHost name: Host name of the client
Host Port^1	Enter the port
Account Type	Select whether the client account is local or domainLocal: The agent's administrator privileges only allow you to manage the device the agent is installed onDomain: The agent's administrator privileges allow you to manage all devices in the domain
Domain^2	Enter the domain name
Account	Enter the administrator account name of the client
Password	Enter the password for the administrator account of the client
Remote Desktop port^1	Enter the port to use when remotely accessing this client
Undeploy^13	Enter the port to use when removing the agent from this client

1 Refer to the General Configuration section of the Settings chapter to find or change the default port.
2 This field only appears if you selected Domain as the account type.
3 Only supported on Windows-based client devices.

3.2 Prerequisites

3.2.1 General prerequisites

• Activate the license keys before deploying agents to client devices. Each client device you wish to deploy an agent to requires a corresponding license key. For more information on activating license keys, please refer to the License section of the Settings chapter.
• Ensure that the ACCE client and server are connected to the Internet and are on the same network domain.
• Ensure that the client has a password-enabled administrator account. This password should be entered during agent deployment. If no password is specified, the default account and password will be used. Refer to Settings > Options > General Configuration > Agent Device's Administrator Account to view or configure the default account and password.

Agent Device's Administrator Account Save Windows Account Administrator Windows Password **** # Linux Account adults Linux Account **** %

• The default Agent device's administrator account and password may differ according to your system language, ensure the Agent device's administrator account and password matches the client device's actual administrator account and password before deploying.
• The client device's system time and date should not be changed unless necessary.
• If an agent has already been deployed to the client device but requires a redeployment, please remove the agent from the client device then redeploy the agent. For more information, please refer to the Removing agents section in this chapter.
• The Re-Deploy function is only used for upgrading versions before ASUS Control Express v1.5 and for repairing agents.

3.2.2 Prerequisites for Windows-based client devices

- Ensure that Remote Service Management is allowed to communicate through Windows Firewall. To manage Windows Firewall settings, right click on the Windows Start icon > Settings > Update & Security > Windows Security > Firewall & network protection > Allow an app through firewall

Allow apps to communicate through Windows Defender Firewall Allowed apps and features: Name Domain Private □ Remote Scheduled Tasks Management □ □ ☑ Remote Service Management ☑ ☑ □ Remote Shutdown □ □ Details... Remove

• Temporarily disable the client device's anti-virus firewall; you may re-enable the anti-virus firewall once the agent deployment process is successfully completed. For more information on disabling the anti-virus firewall please refer to the user manual or product website for your anti-virus.
• If the main server or client device is running Windows 11, connect to the internet, then run Windows Update and confirm that Windows Defender is updated to the latest version before attempting agent deployment.
• If the main server or client device is running Windows 7, please install the following: .Net Framework 4.6.1 or above, SHA-2, and TLS 1.2 on the main server before deploying agents. For more information, please refer to the Setting up a Windows 7 deployment environment section in this chapter.
• If a client device with Windows 7 OS does not support SHA-2 and TLS 1.2, the necessary installations will still be carried out when deploying an agent to the client device. When the agent deployment is finished, please follow the instructions and reset the client device, then redo the agent deployment process on the client device.

3.2.3 Prerequisites for Linux-based client devices

• Install and enable SSH. Refer to the Installing SSH on Linux-based client devices section in this chapter for more information.
• Ensure that the port used for SSH is open on the client device and allowed through the firewall, if applicable.
• To avoid compatibility issues, it is recommended to update the agent on the client device after system kernel updates. Refer to the Updating agents section in this chapter for more information.
• On certain Linux distributions, it may be necessary to update the system kernel and/or software packages before deploying an agent.
• On certain Linux distributions, some features may be unavailable due to incompatibilities with the system kernel and/or software packages.
• On dual-boot systems, ensure that the agent is deployed on each operating system.
• A GNOME (Wayland) desktop environment is required for remote desktop support.

3.2.4 Installing SSH on a Linux-based client device

Installing SSH in Ubuntu/Debian/Pardus

On client devices running Pardus, use Pardus Update to update system components before proceeding.

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following commands to install and enable the SSH service:

sudo apt-get update

sudo apt install openssh-server

sudo systemctl enable ssh

sudo systemctl start ssh

1. Run the following command to check the status of the SSH service.

sudo service ssh status

1. Run the following command to add a firewall exception for the SSH service.

sufo ufw allow ssh

Installing SSH in CentOS/RHEL

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following commands to install and start the SSH service:

sudo yum install openssh-server 

sudo systemctl start sshd 

1. Run the following command to check the status of the SSH service.

sudo systemctl status sshd 

1. Run the following command to enable the SSH service.

sudo systemctl enable sshd 

1. Run the following commands to add a firewall exception for the SSH service (optional).

sudo firewall-cmd --zone=public --permanent --add-service=ssh 

sudo firewall-cmd --reload 

Installing SSH in Fedora

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following commands to install and start the SSH service:

sudo dnf install openssh-server 

sudo systemctl start sshd 

1. Run the following command to check the status of the SSH service.

sudo systemctl status sshd 

1. Run the following command to enable the SSH service.

sudo systemctl enable sshd 

1. Run the following commands to add a firewall exception for the SSH service (optional).

sudo firewall-cmd --add-service=ssh --permanent 

sudo firewall-cmd --reload 

Installing SSH in openSUSE

1. Open a terminal window, then run the following commands to install and start the SSH service:

sudo zypper refresh 

sudo zypper install openssh 

sudo systemctl start sshd 

1. Run the following command to check the status of the SSH service.

sudo systemctl status sshd 

1. Run the following command to enable the SSH service.

sudo systemctl enable sshd 

1. Run the following commands to add a firewall exception for the SSH service.

sudo firewall-cmd --add-service=ssh --permanent 

sudo firewall-cmd --reload 

3.2.5 Additional steps for Windows 7 environments

You will need to set up the Windows 7 OS environment before deploying an agent if the main server or the client device is using Windows 7 OS.

Certain features may not be available on client devices running Windows 7 due to antivirus software incompatibilities.

1. Download the win7patch installation file required for setting up the Windows 7 agent deployment environment from the ASUS website.
2. Move the win7patch zip file into the same folder as the deployment environment settings file (DeployEnvInstall.exe) located in the ASUS Control Center Express\Thirdparty installation folder.

The default installation path for ASUS Control Center Express is ASUS Control Center Express\Thirdparty, if you selected a different path when installing ASUS Control Center Express, ensure to change the installation folder path accordingly.

This PC > Local Disk (C) > Program Files (x98) > ASUS > ASUS Control Center Express > Thirdparty Name Date modified Type Size BroadcastEnvInstall.exe 10/21/2021 8:16 PM Application 2,595 KB DeployEnvInstall.exe 10/21/2021 8:16 PM Application 2,407 KB win7patch.72 10/21/2021 9:20 PM WinRAR archive 137,615 KB

1. Run DeployEnvInstall.exe as administrator to set the deployment environment settings.

This PC > Local Disk (C:) > Program Files (x86) > ASUS > ASUS Control Center Express > Thirdparty Name Date modified Type Size BroadcastEnvInstall.exe 10/21/2021 8:16 PM Application 2,995 KB DeployEnvInstall.exe win7patch.7z Open 2,482 KB Run as administrator 157,015 KB Share with Skype Troubleshoot compatibility Pin to Start Share Open with WinRAR Add to archive... Add to "DeployEnvInstall.rar" Compress and email... Compress to "DeployEnvInstall.rar" and email Extract files... Extract Here Extract to DeployEnvInstall

1. Confirm that the required files for Windows 7 deployment are properly installed in the ASUS Control Center Express\apro_console folder.

Local Disk (C:) > Program Files (x86) > ASUS > ASUS Control Center Express > apro_console > win7Patch > Name Date modified Type Size 04 10/20/2021 6:35 PM File folder 06 10/20/2021 6:35 PM File folder cert 10/21/2021 11:30 AM File folder

3.3 Deploying agents

To ensure successful deployment, read the Prerequisites section in this chapter before proceeding with agent deployment.

3.3.1 Automatically scanning and deploying to devices

1. Click on Auto Scan.
2. After the scan is completed, the devices should appear in the scan results block shown below.

Agent Management Add Auto Scan Scan IP range Remove Import Export Manual Installation of an Agent OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client port Linux ip 192.168.0.13 local admin **** 192.168.0.14 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.18 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.14 10636 Deploy Remove the client device's ACC agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message NEW HOME TO SAVE OS type IP Address/Host Name Scan Results Message Win10(64) 192.168.0.18 Win10(64) 192.168.0.13

1. Double click on a device in the scan results to edit the device information, then click Save.

• Ensure that the account entered in the Privileges. Account field has administrator
• The default account and password displayed is the Agent device's administrator account and password, this can be edited under Settings > Options > General Configurations > Agent device's administrator account. Refer to the General Configuration section of the Settings chapter for more information.

Edit Target Host Main Server 192.168.0.103 OS type Windows Linux Host Type IP Address Host Name 192.168.0.105 Host Port 22 Account Type Local Account ace Password **** Remote desktop port 10637 Save Cancel

1. Once you have finished editing the scanned device information, select the devices you wish to deploy agents to, then click Deploy.

If ACC CSM is already installed on the client device, please export and backup the data first, then check the Remove the client device's ACC agent option before deploying.

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

3.3.2 Scanning an IP range

Depending on your network environment, you may set an IP range to scan for devices, helping you deploy agents quickly and efficiently.

Main Server IP address

This will allow you to set the main server's IP as the scan range.

1. Click on Scan IP range and select Local IP Address.
2. Select the main server's IP address in the IP Source field and the subnet mask range to scan in the Subnet Mask field.
3. Click OK to begin scanning.

Scan IP range Local IP Address IP Source 192.168.0.14 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0/24 Manual IP Address Range Mask Boundary IP Source Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0/24 OK Cancel

1. Double click on a device in the scan results to edit the device information, then click Save once you are finished.
2. Once you have finished editing the scanned device information, select the devices you wish to deploy agents to, then click Deploy.

If ACC CSM is already installed on the client device, please export and backup the data first, then check the Remove the client device's ACC agent option before deploying.

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

Client device IP address

This will allow you to set the client device's IP as the scan range.

1. Click on Scan IP range and select Manual IP Address.
2. Select Mask to scan the subnet mask range of the client device, or select Boundary to set a starting IP and ending IP to scan in the Range field.

Mask:

Manual IP Address Range Mask Boundary IP Source Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0/24

IP Source	Enter the client device’s IP.
Subnet Mask	Select a subnet mask range to scan.

Boundary:

Manual IP Address Range Mask Boundary Start Address End Address

Start Address	Enter the start IP address of the client device you wish to scan.
End Address	Enter the end IP address of the client device you wish to scan.

1. Click OK to begin scanning.
2. Double click on a device in the scan results to edit the device information, then click Save once you are finished.
3. Once you have finished editing the scanned device information, select the devices you wish to deploy agents to, then click Deploy.

If ACC CSM is already installed on the client device, please export and backup the data first, then check the Remove the client device's ACC agent option before deploying.

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

3.3.3 Adding and deploying to devices

Adding a single device

1. Click on Add.

2. Enter the information of the device you wish to add, then click on Save.

Edit Target Host Main Server 192.168.0.103 OS type Windows Linux Host Type IP Address Host Name 192.168.0.105 Host Port 22 Account Type Local Account ace Password **** Remote desktop port 10637 Save Cancel

1. Click on Save, the device should appear in the device list.

2. Select the devices you wish to deploy agents to in the device list, then click Deploy.

If ACC CSM is already installed on the client device, please export and backup the data first, then select the Remove the client device's ACC agent option before deploying.

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

Adding multiple devices

If you already have an existing exported device list CSV file for ASUS Control Center Express, you may use the Import function to import multiple devices for deployment.

1. Click on Import.
2. Browse for the CSV file you wish to import, then click Open.
3. The imported devices will appear in the device list, select the devices you wish to deploy agents to, then click Deploy.

If ACC CSM is already installed on the client device, please export and backup the data first, then check the Remove the client device's ACC agent option before deploying.

Click on Export to export the current device list to a CSV file which you may edit using text editor.

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

3.3.4 Editing device information

You may edit the device information of scanned or added devices before deploying agents.

1. Double click on the device you wish to edit.
2. Click on Save once you have finished.

Edit Target Host Main Server 192.168.0.14 OS type Windows Host Type IP Address Host Name 192.168.0.13 Host Port 10636 Account Type Local Domain Account Administrator Password **** Remote Desktop port 10637 Undeploy port 10638 Cancel Save

3.3.5 Installing agents manually

Manual installation on Windows-based client devices

1. Click Manual Installation of an Agent, then select Windows to download the installation file (Setup.msi).

Agent Management Add Auto Scan Scan IP range Remove Import Export Manual Installation of an Agent OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client pu An Agent Selection

1. Using an external storage device or other file transfer method, copy the installation file to the client device.
2. On the client device, double click on the installation file to launch the installation.

Downloads File Horse Share View This PC Downloads Search Downloads Quick access Desktop Downloads Documents Pictures Music Videos OneDrive This PC HOWARD (E) Network Setup 1 item

1. Enter the main server's IP into the Server IP field, then click Next. The Server Port field's default port may be adjusted if necessary.

ASUS Control Center Express Please enter information about the deploy : Server IP Server Port 10632 Next

1. Please verify the client device information received by the main server. If any of the default ports are already in use, please make adjustments accordingly after the installation through the ASUS Control Center Express main server.

Please check information about the deploy Client IP 192 . 168 . b . 13 Client Port Default : 10636 Account Default : Administrator Password Default : admin Desktop Port Default : 10637 UnDeploy Port Default : 10638 Deploy

1. Click on Deploy, then wait for the deployment to be completed.

Manual installation on Linux-based client devices

1. Click Manual Installation of an Agent, then select Linux to download the installation file (Setup).

Agent Management Add Auto Scan Scan IP range Remove Import Export Manual Installation of an Agent OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client port

1. Using an external storage device or other file transfer method, copy the installation file to the client device.
2. On the client device, open a terminal window in the directory of the installation file, then run the following commands:

sudo chmod +x Setup

sudo ./Setup

1. When prompted, enter the IP address, host communication port (default: 10632), SSH port (default: 22), account, and password.
2. Wait for the deployment to be completed.

3.3.6 Installing agents in silent mode

Silent mode installation parameters

Server IP	ASUS Control Center Express server IP (mandatory)
Client IP	Local host IP (mandatory)
Client port	Local host port (optional)
Account	Local host user account (optional)
Password	Local host user password (optional)
Outfail	Dump deploy fail to file (optional)

Feedback results

0 ERROR_SUCCESS	Action completed successfully
1602 ERROR_INSTALL_USEREXIT	Installation canceled by user
1603 ERROR_INSTALL_FAILURE	Fatal error during installation
1639 ERROR_INVALID_COMMAND_LINE	Invalid command line argument

Please see an example below:

1. Run Windows PowerShell as Administrator.

Best match Windows PowerShell Desktop app Run as administrator Open file location Pin to Start Pin to taskbar Uninstall Run as Administrator Run ISE as Administrator Windows PowerShell ISE pcw

1. Enter the command to run the agent installation. For example,

(Start-Process msiexec '/i "C:\Setup.msi" serverip=192.168.1.2 /qb -Wait -Passthru).ExitCode 

系统管理员: Windows PowerShell PS C:\Users\ Code (Start-Process msiexec 'I "C:\Users\Screp.msj" serverip=192.76W.1.2 /gb '-Wait -Pass thru _Exit

Details during the deployment

1. Please add the outfall parameter in the command line. For example,

(Start-Process msiexec '/i "F:\ Setup.msi" serverip=192.168.1.2 clientip=192.168.1.200 outfail="D:\\ New folder\Fail.txt" /qb '-Wait -Passthru).ExitCode 

系统管理员: Windows PowerShell PS C:\Users\ (Start-Process msiexec 7.1. "P.S.M.C" status data/Node/SSources\all.NanofInstall Control\SapiRuna start after the process of a new file, new server p=92.168.1.2.01 entry p=92.168.1.250 outfall='0' Now folder full (.txt /ch -Wait -Passithout.ExitCode_

1. Once the installation is finished, the results will be saved to D:\New Folder\Fail.txt.

Client device has previously already installed the agent and needs to reinstall

1. Please remove the installed agent from the client device. For example, (Start-Process msiexec '/x "C:\ Setup.msi" /q '-Wait -Passthru).ExitCode

2. Run the agent installation command. For example, (Start-Process msiexec '/i "C:\Setup.msi" serverip=192.168.1.2 /qb -Wait -Passthru).ExitCode

3.3.7 Upgrading or repairing agents

If the ASUS Control Center Express version is older than version 1.4.27, some functions may not work properly after restarting the client device. Please follow the steps below or click on the information icon on the bottom of the Agent Management page to upgrade the agent or repair the agent.

Agent Management Add Scan IP range Remove Import Export Existing Clients Manual Installation OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client port No Rows To Show Deploy Re-Deploy ■ Remove the client device's ACC agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message No Rows To Show Connection Alias Host Name OS type IP Address/Host Name Scan Results Message Offline DESKTOP-F146R6P DASH Win10(64) 192.168.1.104 ?

Before upgrading or repairing the agent, please check your ASUS Control Center Express version:

• ASUS Control Center Express main software version

Go to Settings > Options > General Configuration, then scroll down to the Appearance Configuration block, the Software version should be displayed there.

Appearance Configuration Save Reset Software version 1.5.3 Choose file Browse Banner Logo ASUS® Debug Mode

- Client device agent version

The agent version of the client device will be displayed in the column in the device list on the device overview.

Agent Version

ASUS Conduction Hardware Sense Utilization Event Log 192.768.35 IT server 2F voltage-CPU Core Voltage over than Critical threshold 192.768.35 IT server 2F voltage-CPU Core voltage under Warning/Critical threshold 192.768.35 IT server 2F voltage-CPU Core voltage over than Critical threshold Phase Enter to search... Clear Group Select function COS Version BIOS Release Date WatchDrag Registry Editor USB Storage Device Agent Version - M C K02 11/12/2020 N/A ENABLE ENABLE 1.5.3.0 K01 03/13/2020 N/A ENABLE ENABLE 1.5.3.0 K03 01/23/2021 N/A ENABLE ENABLE 1.5.3.0 K06 09/13/2020 DISABLE ENABLE ENABLE 1.5.3.0 K01 2019/12/02 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 14.2.0 K01 2019/12/02 DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE 14.2.0 K01 2019/12/02 DISABLE

You may also view the agent version of a single client device in the Information page by clicking on the client device.

Device

Device Information IT server 01 OS Information Logon User BIOS Version Model Name IP Address Timezone Up Time Agent Version Operating Status Win10(64) Administrator 1302 PB60S 192.168.0.15 UTC +08:00 Taipes Standard Time 0:3:55:51 1.5.3.0 Normal Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log Remote Desktop

Updating from version 1.4.XX to version 1.5.X

1. Download the latest version of ASUS Control Center Express (1.5.X or later), then run the installation of the ASUS Control Center Express main software on the main server.

2. Once the installation is completed, check the device(s) you wish to update or repair from the device list, and select the Client Agent Updater from the shortcut function drop down menu.

ASUS Connection (●) 5 Hardware Sensor 1 Utilization 1 Remote Control OOB - Control Screen Broadcast Security Task Scheduler Software Management Smart BIOS Report Generator Operating Status Press Enter to switch... Clear IT Department Client Agent Update Connection Alias Logos User OS Information IP Address HW Sensor US Maintain IT server 04 N/A Win10(84) 192.168.0.14 Normal No Device Manager Online IT server 01 Administrator Win10(84) 192.168.0.15 Critical Normal PBIOS 1302 Offline IT server 02 Administrator Win10(84) 192.168.0.21 Normal Normal VOBS-C1 1001 Offline IT server 03 DASH Win10(84) 192.168.1.105 Normal Warning Pro B950M-C 1823 Offline IT server 05 Administrator Win10(84) 192.168.0.17 Normal Normal Pro WIS X570-A 2206

1. Click on Yes in the confirmation pop-up window to proceed with the update.
2. You can view the agent deployment and update results in the mission center.

Updating from version 1.3.X or earlier versions to version 1.5.X

1. Download the latest version of ASUS Control Center Express (1.5.X or later), then run the installation of the ASUS Control Center Express main software on the main server.
2. Click on located at the top right menu bar of the main menu.

ASUS Connections Hardware Sensor Utilization Event Log 1 5 1 1 1 Clear IT Department Select function Connection Alias Login User OS Information IP Address HW Sensor Utilization M/C Motor Name BIOS Version BIOS Maintain IT server 04 N/A Win1(964) 182.168.0.14 Normal Normal N/A VCSR 1401 04/20 Offline IT server 02 Administrator Win1(964) 182.168.0.21 Normal Normal N/A VCS-C1 1001 03/15 Offline IT server 03 DASH Win1(964) 182.168.1.195 Normal Washing Pto BSSOM-C 1800 01/23 Offline IT server 06 Administrator Win1(964) 182.168.0.17 Normal Normal Pto WS XSTO-A... 2206 08/13 Online IT server 01 Administrator Win1(964) 182.168.0.15 Normal Normal PB905 1302 11/12

1. Click on Existing Clients to load and display all client devices with agents already deployed.

Agent Management Add Scan IP range Remove Import Export Existing Clients Manual Installation OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client port Windows ip 192.168.0.2 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.20 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.3 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.4 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.5 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.191 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636

1. Once the list of client devices with agents already deployed has loaded, please check if the information for the client device(s) are correct, such as administrator account and password, for more information you can refer to 3.2.4 Editing device information. Click Re-Deploy once you have confirmed the information of the client device(s) are correct.

Agent Management Add Scan IP range Remove Import Export Existing Clients Manual installation OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server Client port Windows ip 192.168.0.75 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.14 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.21 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.1.105 local Administrator **** 192.168.1.103 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.17 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Windows ip 192.168.0.15 local Administrator **** 192.168.0.9 10636 Deploy Re-Deploy Remove the client device's ACC agent

1. The results of the deployment will be shown in the Deploy List.

In case of an unsuccessful deployment, refer to the Deployment Troubleshooting section in this chapter for more information.

3.3.8 Installing an agent onto the main server

The agent can also be manually installed on the main server to perform management and maintenance tasks through ASUS Control Center Express.

• The main server can only be used as a broadcast source in the Screen Broadcast function in this configuration.
• A video feedback loop effect may occur if the Remote Desktop function is used to control the main server.

Manual installation on a Windows-based server

1. Click on Manual Installation of an Agent to start downloading the installation file (Setup.msi).
2. Double click on the installation file to launch the installation.
3. Enter the main server's IP or 127.0.0.1 into the Server IP field, then click Next. The Server Port field's default port may be adjusted if necessary.
4. Please verify the client device information received by the main server. If any of the default ports are already in use, please make adjustments accordingly after the installation through the ASUS Control Center Express main server.
5. Click on Deploy, then wait for the deployment to be completed.

Manual installation on a Linux-based server

1. Click Manual Installation of an Agent, then select Linux to download the installation file (Setup).
2. Open a terminal window in the directory of the installation file, then run the following commands:

sudo chmod +x Setup

sudo ./Setup

1. When prompted, enter the IP address, host communication port (default: 10632), SSH port (default: 22), account, and password.
2. Wait for the deployment to be completed.

3.4 Deployment troubleshooting

3.4.1 Viewing detailed error information

In case of unsuccessful or partially successful deployment, click the corresponding entry in the Deploy List for more information.

Deploy Re Deploy ■ Remove the client device's ACG agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message Linux 192.168.0.104 Successfully deployed Remote computer successfully deployed (Warning!) Please click this message to view detail Linux 192.168.0.106 Successfully deployed Remote computer successfully deployed

Warning IP Address: 192.168.0.124 OS type: Linux Unable to download the same version of the package as Linux kernel, below functions may be abnormal: [0x8390001A] 1. Deployment 2. Hardware Sensor > Voltage, Temperature, Fan information 3. BIOS > BIOS Setting > Enable BIOS Setting OK

3.4.2 Common errors (Linux)

Invalid SSH account or password

Check if the account or password matches the settings on the client device.

3.4.3 Common errors (Windows)

SYSTEM_ERROR: 86	Check if the account or password matches the settings on the client device.
SYSTEM_ERROR: 5	Check if Windows Firewall is configured to allow Remote Service Management on the client device.

3.5 Updating agents

When your main ASUS Control Center Express server has been updated, you can easily update the agents of all client devices, ensuring your main ASUS Control Center Express main server and client agents are all up to date with the latest updates using the Client Agent Updater function.

You can view the current agent version from the device overview on the main menu page or from the Device Information page.

ASUS Connection [MS] Functional Server Configuration Count Log Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unactive Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unative Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unitive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unive Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unovate Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove Active/Unove

Device Information Server3 - WS X570 ACE OS Information Logon User BIOS Version Model Name IP Address Timezone Up Time Agent Version 1.4.21.0 Operating Status Normal Mode Software Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log

1. Select the devices you would like to perform an agent update on.

Classic dashboard

Graphic dashboard

ASUS Connective (00) 150 Hardware Tone... 343 Utilization 343 Reset Log H2, NBA 01 page number: 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Close Case to action Close Select Function

1. Click on Select function, then select Client Agent Updater from the drop down menu.

2. Click Yes on the confirmation pop up window.

3. You can view the agent deploy and update progress in the Mission Center.

ASUS Generation Hardware Demo Utilization Agent Log Device 1: 3.0 Device 2: 3.0 Device 3: 3.0 Device 4: 3.0 Device 5: 3.0 Device 6: 3.0 Device 7: 3.0 Device 8: 3.0 Device 9: 3.0 Device 10: 3.0 Device 11: 3.0 Device 12: 3.0 Device 13: 3.0 Device 14: 3.0 Device 15: 3.0 Device 16: 3.0 Device 17: 3.0 Device 18: 3.0 Device 19: 3.0 Device 20: 3.0 Device 21: 3.0 Device 22: 3.0 Device 23: 3.0 Device 24: 3.0 Device 25: 3.0 Device 26: 3.0 Device 27: 3.0 Device 28: 3.0 Device 29: 3.0 Device 30: 3.0 Device 31: 3.0 Device 32: 3.0 Device 33: 3.0 Device 34: 3.0 Device 35: 3.0 Device 36: 3.0 Device 37: 3.0 Device 38: 3.0 Device 39: 3.0 Device 40: 3.0 Device 41: 3.0 Device 42: 3.0 Device 43: 3.0 Device 44: 3.0 Device 45: 3.0 Device 46: 3.0 Device 47: 3.0 Device 48: 3.0 Device 49: 3.0 Device 50: 3.0 Device 51: 3.0 Device 52: 3.0 Device 53: 3.0 Device 54: 3.0 Device 55: 3.0 Device 56: 3.0 Device 57: 3.0 Device 58: 3.0 Device 59: 3.0 Device 60: 3.0 Device 61: 3.0 Device 62: 3.0 Device 63: 3.0 Device 64: 3.0 Device 65: 3.0 Device 66: 3.0 Device 67: 3.0 Device 68: 3.0 Device 69: 3.0 Device 70: 3.0 Device 71: 3.0 Device 72: 3.0 Device 73: 3.0 Device 74: 3.0 Device 75: 3.0 Device 76: 3.0 Device 77: 3.0 Device 78: 3.0 Device 79: 3.0 Device 80: 3.0 Device 81: 3.0 Device 82: 3.0 Device 83: 3.0 Device 84: 3.0 Device 85: 3.0 Device 86: 3.0 Device 87: 3.0 Device 88: 3.0 Device 89: 3.0 Device 90: 3.0 Device 91: 3.0 Device 92: 3.0 Device 93: 3.0 Device 94: 3.0 Device 95: 3.0 Device 96: 3.0 Device 97: 3.0 Device 98: 3.0 Device 99: 3.0 Device100:12 (192,158,6,14, Running) Client Agent Update: Agent Updater (192,158,6,14, Running) Agent Updater (192,158,6,14, Running) Agent Updater (192,158,6,14, Running) Agent Updater (192,158,6,14, Running)

- Agent updates can only be performed on client devices that are online. If you selected multiple devices and some of the devices selected are offline, you can view the failure to deploy and update message in the Mission Center, and update these devices when they are online.

- If the connection is unstable during the agent update process, the agent update status on the Mission Center will be displayed as Finish, and the task name will become grayed out and unclickable, the agent on the client device will be reverted to the version prior to the update. You can update the client device again when it is online.

- If the client device was powered off or restarted during the agent update process, the agent update status on the Mission Center will be displayed as Finish, and the task name will become grayed out and unclickable, and will resume the update process once the client device has restarted and is in OS.

- Certain functions may be affected if the main ASUS Control Center Express server version has already been updated to v1.4.x or above but the client device agent has not been updated (v1.3.x).

3.6 Removing agents

The screenshots in this section are for reference only.

This section will guide you through the agent removal process if you need to redeploy or remove agents.

3.6.1 Removing agents through the main server

1. On the Agent Management page, double click on a single client device to remove the agent on that device, or check multiple devices you wish to remove agents from.

OS type | IP Address/Host Name | Scan Results | Message | Win10(64) 192.168.0.18 Win10(64) 192.168.0.13

1. Click on the Remove icon 📋, then click OK to remove the agents on all selected devices.

If the selected client device(s) are offline, the agents on these client device(s) will be removed once the client device(s) are online.

1. If the agent was manually installed onto a Windows-based client device, follow the steps in the Removing manually installed agents on Windows section.

These steps are only required for manually installed agents on Windows-based client devices. No further action is required for Linux-based client devices.

3.6.2 Removing manually installed agents on Windows

If you manually installed an agent on a Windows-based client device, please follow the steps below to remove the agent from the client device.

• These steps are only required for manually installed agents on Windows-based client devices.
• If a client device with an agent already deployed to it has been in for repairs or maintenance, please remove the agent on the client device, then re-deploy an agent to the device. To deploy an agent to a device please refer to the Deploying agents section.

• Ensure to remove the client device from the ASUS Control Center Express server as well as manually remove the agent from the client device.

• Ensure that the device is removed from the ASUS Control Center Express server. Refer to the Removing agents through main server section for more information.

• On the client device, navigate to the Apps & features menu.
• Search for and select click Uninstall. ASUS Control Center Express Manual Deploy, then

ASUS Control Center Express Manual Deploy 1.53 MB 8/21/2020 1.4.22 Modify Uninstall

Chapter 4

This chapter describes the device information and software controlled options for managing the device.

Device Information

4.1 Device information overview

The Device Information Overview provides you with detailed information about your selected client device, and also provides you with some software controlled management functions such as power control options.

To access Device Information of a client device from the different views, please refer to the following:

• Classic view: Click on a client device in the device list.
• Graphical view: Double click on a client device shortcut icon.

• Hardware Mode (out-of-band management) options are available for client devices connected using a management LAN port with remote management controller support.
• Most options are only available when the client device is online and logged into the OS.
• Some options are only available when the following requirements are met:

- Client device is online and logged into the OS

- Has already had an agent deployed to it

- Connected using a management LAN port with remote management controller support

- The screenshots in this section are for reference only.

This chapter is only for the Software Mode options, for Hardware Mode options, please refer to the Management Functions chapter.

Toggle between Software and Hardware Mode

Device Information Mode Software Server3 - WS X570 ACE OS Information Logon User BIOS Version Model Name IP Address Timezone Up Time Agent Version Operating Status Win10(64) asus 2007 Pro WS X570-ACE 192.168.0.13 UTC +08:00 Taipei Standard Time 1:1:7:37 1.4.21.0 Normal Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log Remote Desktop USB Redirection BIOS

4.2 Device information details

Device Information Server3 - WS X570 ACE OS Information Logon User BIOS Version Model Name IP Address Timezone Up Time Agent Version Operating Status Win10(64) asus 2007 Pro WS X570-ACE 192.168.0.13 UTC +08:00 Taipei Standard Time 1:1:7:37 1.4.21.0 Normal Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log Remote Desktop USB Redirection BIOS

Device Name	Displays the device name. Click on to edit the device name.
OS Information	Displays information on the Operating System.
Logon user	Displays the user logged into client device. If the client device is powered off, offline, or logged out, this field will show the last logged in user enclosed in brackets ("[]").
BIOS Version	Displays information on the BIOS version.
Model Name	Displays the model name of client device.
IP Address	Displays the IP address of client device.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone client device is located in.
Up Time	Displays the up time of client device.
Agent Version	Displays information on the Agent version.
Operating Status	Allows you to set the operating status (Maintenance, Standby, Normal) of the device. For more information please refer to the Operating Status section in this chapter.

4.3 Device information functions

Device Information Mode Software Server3 - WS X570 ACE B OS Information Logen User BIOS Version Model Name IP Address Timezone Up Time Agent Version Operating Status Win10(04) ASUS 2007 Pro WS X570-ACE 192.168.0.13 UTC +08:00 Taipei Standard Time 1:1:7:37 1:4:21:0 Normal Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log Remote Desktop USB Redirection BIOS

The Device Information page also allows you to view information or utilize the different functions available to control and manage the device using the functions located to the right of the screen.

Hardware Sensor	Displays the device hardware sensor information.
Utilization	Displays the device utilization information
Inventory	Displays the device disk information and asset information.
Software	Allows you to view and manage software installed on the device.
Control	Allows you to view and adjust the Regedit, USB storage device, and remote power option settings.
Event Log	Allows you to view, import, or export the device event log.
Remote Desktop	Allows you to remotely control the device.
USB Redirection	Allows you share a drive of single device.
BIOS	Allows you to manage the device BIOS.
Installer	Allows you to download and update drivers, applications, and BIOS of the device.* On Linux-based client devices, only BIOS updates are supported
Device List	Allows you to view the system components of the device.* On Linux-based client devices, only PCI devices are shown
System Restore*	Allows you to create, delete, or restore system restore points for the client device.
BitLocker*	Allows you to configure BitLocker on the device.

* Only supported on Windows-based client devices

4.3.1 Operating Status

You can set the operating status of a single or multiple devices to Maintenance, Standby, or Normal. You can set the operating status either through the Device Information screen or by navigating back to the main menu page, then selecting multiple devices and selecting an operating status in the Operating Status field from the Select Function drop down menu.

The operating status changes can be viewed on the Connection overview. The Maintenance or Standby operating status will only be displayed when the client device is offline or powered off. If the device is not offline or powered off, it will display its current connection status as the operating status.

• If a powered off or offline device set to Maintenance or Standby is powered on or connected to the network, the Connection overview status will display it as Online.
• The screenshot below shows the Operating Status drop down menu on the Device Information screen.

Device Information Mode Software DESKTOP-CQFO210 OS Information Win10(64) Logon User N/A BIOS Version 1001 Model Name Pro WS X570-ACE IP Address 192.168.0.13 Timezone UTC -08:00 Pacific Standard Time Up Time 0:0:21:11 Agent Version 1.2.2.0 Maintain Status Normal Maintain Standby Normal Hardware Sensor Utilization Inventory Software Control Event Log Remote Desktop

4.3.2 Hardware Sensor (software)

This item allows you to view S.M.A.R.T attributes or edit the threshold value for items such as voltage, temperature, fans, and graphics card. This item is software controlled and values may differ with the hardware version. Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• DASH devices: Hardware Sensor (DASH)
- RTL8117 devices: Hardware Sensor (RTL8117)
• BMC devices: Hardware Sensor (BMC)

• Some options such as graphics card may only be available if you have the component installed on your client device.
• Click on to hide or show sub items.
• This item will not be available if your device is not logged into an OS environment, or is not connected using a management LAN port remote management controller support.
• If your motherboard has a supported remote management controller, you may switch to Hardware mode, or you may view the hardware sensor information of the previous time the device was powered on if the device is currently powered off.
• Support for certain device sensors on Linux-based client devices may be unavailable or may vary depending on Linux distribution.

Hardware Sensor S.M.A.R.T. ST1003LM049-2CH172 Normal Voltage CPU Core Voltage COSA 4.980 V

S.M.A.R.T.	Displays disk status, click on this item to show detailed S.M.A.R.T. attribute information.* S.M.A.R.T. information may vary depending on drive specifications and manufacturer-supplied information.
Voltage	Displays the CPU Core Voltage, and other voltage related items. You may edit the threshold for these items.
Temperature	Displays the CPU status and temperature. You may edit the threshold for these items.
Fans	Displays the status and fan speed of connected fans. You may edit the threshold for these items.
Graphics Card	Displays the fan speed, voltage and temperature of NVIDIA or AMD graphics cards. You may edit the threshold for these items.* Graphics card information may vary according to driver support.

Editing the threshold value

Some items such as Voltage items, or Fan items allow you to edit the threshold values. Click on the item you wish to edit, then click on Save once you are finished editing.

• The threshold options for each item may vary.
• Some items may not have a threshold value you can edit.

CPU Fan High threshold 7200 Low threshold 200 Monitor Enable Check zero value Enable Save Cancel

High threshold	When the value exceeds this threshold value, the sensor will display Warning (Yellow).When the value exceeds this threshold value by 20%, the sensor will display Critical (Red).
Low threshold	When the value is below this threshold value, the sensor will display Warning (Yellow).When the value is below this threshold value by 20%, the sensor will display Critical (Red).
Monitor	Enable or disable monitoring of this item.
Check zero value	Enable or disable the check for zero value. When enabled, a warning will display if the fan speed for a fan is 0. When disabled, if the fan speed for a fan is 0, it will be recognized as a removed fan (not connected).

4.3.3 Utilization

This item allows you to view and set the utilization threshold value for the CPU, DIMM, Partition, and Network of a single device.

Click on ▼o hide or show sub items.

Utilization CPU (B) Name Status Percentage CPU0 Normal 11% CPU1 Normal 11% CPU2 Normal 11% CPU3 Normal 0% DIMM Name Status Percentage

CPU	Displays CPU utilization status and usage percentile. You may edit the threshold for these items.
DIMM	Displays memory utilization status and usage percentile. You may edit the threshold for these items.
Partition	Displays disk partition utilization status and usage percentile. You may edit the threshold for these items.
Network	Displays disk network utilization status and usage percentile. You may edit the threshold for these items.

Editing the threshold value

Click on the item you wish to edit, then click on Save once you are finished editing.

CPU Threshold High Critical 95 High Warning 90 Save Cancel

High Critical	When the value exceeds this threshold value, the sensor will display Critical (Red).
High Warning	When the value exceeds this threshold value, the sensor will display Warning (Yellow).

4.3.4 Inventory (software)

This item will not be available if your device is not logged into an OS environment, or is not connected using a management LAN port which supports a remote management controller.

This item displays more details about a single client device and disk. This item is software controlled and values may differ with the hardware version. Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• DASH devices: Inventory (DASH)
- RTL8117 devices: Inventory (RTL8117)
• vPro devices: Inventory (vPro)
• BMC devices: Inventory (BMC)

Disk Information

Click on Disk Information for more details on the disk.

Inventory Disk Information Asset Information ST1000LM049-2GH172 Media Type Fixed hard disk media Serial Number WGSDYETN Status OK Manufacturer (Standard disk drives) Size $31 Gigabytes SMART TRUE

Disk Name	Displays the disk name.
Media Type	Displays the media type.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number for the disk.
Status	Displays the status of the disk.
Manufacture	Displays the name of the manufacturer of the disk.
Size	Displays the total size of the disk.
S.M.A.R.T.	Displays the S.M.A.R.T. attribute status of the disk.

Asset Information

Click on Asset Information for more details on the client device. You may also edit items with a gray border by double clicking on the item.

Inventory Disk Information Asset Information Base board Model Name VC65-C Serial Number SERIAL-1234567890 Asset Tag Default string Manufacturer ASUSTEK COMPUTER INC. System Product Name VC65-C Manufacturer ASUSTEK COMPUTER INC.

Baseboard	Displays the model name, serial number, asset tag and manufacturer information on the base motherboard.
System	Displays the name and manufacturer of the system.
Memory	Displays the location and size of the memory.
BIOS	Displays the release date, version, and manufacturer information of the BIOS.
Processor	Displays the name, and clock of the processor.
Network Adapter	Displays the name, MAC address, connection status, and adapter type information on the network adapter.
Graphic Card	Displays the name, driver version, and other information of the graphic card.
OEM String	Displays the device's SMBIOS TYPE information.

4.3.5 Software

This item displays details on the software and applications of a single device with the Application, Processes, Services, and Environment tab.

- Some operating system applications, processes, and services cannot be removed, terminated, or stopped.

- Clicking on a column header will sort the information alphabetically based on the items in that column.

Application tab

The Application tab allows you to view information on installed applications on the client device. You may also click on an application then select Uninstall to uninstall the application.

- The Uninstall button will be grayed out if the uninstall option is unavailable for the selected application.

- Click on the (Ie fresh) button to immediately refresh and update the software list.

Software Application Processes Services Environment Software name Software Version Publisher Installation Date AnyDesk ad 5.4.2 philandro Software GmbH 2020-02-13 ASUS Control Center Express Manual Deploy 1.4.4 ASUS 2020-05-05 CPUID ASUS CPU-Z 1.88 1.88 CPUID, Inc 2020-06-10 CPUID CPU-Z 1.84 1.84 CPUID, Inc 2020-06-08 FileZile Client 3:472.1 3:47.2.1 Tim Klose 2020-04-09 Google Chrome 00.0.3907.163 Google UIC 2020-04-08 HD Tune Pro 5.75 FFD Software 2020-06-02

Processes tab

The Processes tab allows you to view information on active processes. You may also click on a process then select End Task to end the process.

Software Application Processes Services Environment Software name P&D Executable Path System Idle Process 0 System 4 Registry 144 system.exe 480 context.exe 640 wrink.exe 728 context.exe 736

Services tab

The Services tab allows you to view information on the services available. You may click on a service then choose to start the service by clicking on Start, or stop a running process by clicking on Stop.

Software Application Processes Services Environment Software name PLO Description State A/BRouter 0 Aldcysn Router Service Stop A/G 0 Application Layer Gateway Service Stop AnyDesk 40% AnyDesk Service Running AppIDsc 0 Application Identity Stop AppInfo 0 Application Information Stop AppMgmt 0 Application Management Stop AppReadiness 0 App Readiness Stop

Environment tab

The Environment tab allows you to view information on the environment variables.

Software Application Processes Services Environment Software name Value accep 192.1680.13 accomport 10636 acceoklms 0 accep 192.1680.9 accomport 10632 acceskld 35597 ALLUSERSPROFILE CyProgramData

4.3.6 Control (software)

• This item will not be available if your device is not logged into an OS environment.
• If the below settings have not previously been configured using ASUS Control Center Express, the default value of "Not config" will be displayed.
• Use the Mission Center to check if the task was completed successfully. Refer to the Mission Center section for more information.

This item allows you to configure system, USB, power, and boot options. This item is software controlled and values may differ with the hardware version.

Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• DASH devices: Control (DASH)
- RTL8117 devices: Control (RTL8117)
• vPro devices: Control (vPro)
• BMC devices: Control (BMC)

Control Regedit Enable USB Storage Device Enable Mode Software

Enable/Disable Regedit*	Enable or disable the Windows Registry Editor.
USB Storage Device	Enable or disable the USB port, or set it to Read Only.
Restart Computer	Restart the client device.
Power On	Power on the client device, if Wake-on-LAN is supported by the client device.* On Windows-based client devices, disable Quick Startup and enable Wake-on-LAN for the network card in the Device Manager.** On Linux-based client devices, Wake-on-LAN may depend on network card support. Refer to the Enabling Wake-on-LAN sections for more information.
Power Off	Power off the client device.
Removable device(s)	Enable, disable, or set removable devices as read-only.
Fast Startup*	Enable or disable fast startup for the client device.
Windows Update*	Enable or disable Windows Update for the client device.
Set Management Controller	Set the IP address of the vPro or BMC management controller.* This function is only supported if the client device supports vPro or BMC remote management

* Only supported on Windows-based client devices

Enabling Wake-on-LAN in Ubuntu/Debian

1. Enter the BIOS of the client device, then enable Power on by PCIE.
2. Boot into the operating system, then open a terminal window and run the following command to install ethtool:

sudo apt install ethtool 

1. Run the following command and note the name of the network adapter (for example, eth0 or enp5s0):

ip a
...
2: enp5s0 <BROADCAST, MULTICAST, UP, LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 ... 

1. Run the following command to check the Wake-on-LAN status of the network adapter, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool <adapter> | grep Wake 

1. If the Wake-on-LAN status is d, or disabled, run the following command to enable Wake-on-LAN, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool -s <adapter> wol g 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/system/ 

sudo nano wol.service 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the name of the network adapter:

[Unit]
Description=Wake-on-LAN
Requires=network.target
After=network.target
[Service]
ExecStart=/sbin/ethtool -s <adapter> wol g
Type=oneshot
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target

1. Run the following command to enable the Wake-on-LAN service:

sudo systemctl enable wol.service 

Enabling Wake-on-LAN in Pardus

1. Enter the BIOS of the client device, then enable Power on by PCIE.
2. Boot into the operating system, then open a terminal window and run the following command to install ethtool:

sudo apt install ethtool 

1. Run the following command and note the name of the network adapter (for example, eth0 or enp5s0):

ip a
...
2: enp5s0 <BROADCAST, MULTICAST, UP, LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 ... 

1. Run the following command to check the Wake-on-LAN status of the network adapter, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool <adapter> | grep Wake 

1. If the Wake-on-LAN status is d, or disabled, run the following command to enable Wake-on-LAN, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool -s <adapter> wol g 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/system/ 

sudo nano wol.service 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the name of the network adapter:

[Unit]
Description=Wake-on-LAN
Requires=network.target
After=network.target
[Service]
Type=oneshot
RemainAfterExit=yes
ExecStart=/usr/sbin/ethtool -s <adapter> wol d
ExecStop=/usr/sbin/ethtool -s <adapter> wol g
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target 

1. Run the following command to enable the Wake-on-LAN service:

sudo systemctl enable wol.service 

Enabling Wake-on-LAN in CentOS/RHEL

1. Enter the BIOS of the client device, then enable Power on by PCIE.
2. Boot into the operating system, then open a terminal window and run the following command to install ethtool:

sudo yum install ethtool 

1. Run the following command and note the name of the network adapter (for example, eth0 or enp5s0):

ip a
...
2: enp5s0 <BROADCAST, MULTICAST, UP, LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 ... 

1. Run the following command to check the Wake-on-LAN status of the network adapter, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool <adapter> | grep Wake 

1. If the Wake-on-LAN status is d, or disabled, run the following command to enable Wake-on-LAN, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool -s <adapter> wol g 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/udev/rules.d/ 

sudo nano 99-wakeonlan 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the name of the network adapter:

KERNEL=<adapter>,
ACTION=="online",
PROGRAM="/bin/systemctl start wakeonlan.service" 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /usr/system/ 

sudo nano systemd-wakeonlan 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the name of the network adapter:

[ $EUID = 0 ] || exit 4
start() {
    ethtool -s <adapter> wol g
}
stop() {
    sleep 0
}
case "$1" in
    start|stop) "$1" ;;
esac 

1. Run the following command to set permissions for systemd-wakeonlan:

sudo chmod +x /usr/lib/systemd/systemd-wakeonlan 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /usr/lib/systemd/system 

sudo nano wakeonlan.service 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the name of the network adapter:

[Unit]
Description=Configure Wake-on-LAN
[Service]
Type=oneshot
RemainAfterExit=yes
ExecStart=/usr/lib/systemd/systemd-wakeonlan start
ExecStop=/usr/lib/systemd/systemd-wakeonlan stop
[Install]
WantedBy=basic.target 

1. Run the following command to enable the Wake-on-LAN service:

sudo systemctl enable wakeonlan.service 

Enabling Wake-on-LAN in Fedora

1. Enter the BIOS of the client device, then enable Power on by PCIE.
2. Boot into the operating system, then open a terminal window and run the following command to install ethtool:

sudo dnf install ethtool 

1. Run the following command and note the name (for example, eth0 or enp5s0) and MAC address (for example, aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff) of the network adapter:

ip a 

1. Run the following command to check the Wake-on-LAN status of the network adapter, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool <adapter> | grep Wake 

1. If the Wake-on-LAN status is d, or disabled, run the following command to enable Wake-on-LAN, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool -s <adapter> wol g 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/network/ 

sudo nano 50-wired.link 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the MAC address of the network adapter:

[Match]
MACAddress=<mac>
[Link]
NamePolicy=kernel database onboard slot path
MACAddressPolicy=persistent
WakeOnLAN=magic 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/system/ 

sudo nano wol.service 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where
   is the name of the network adapter:

[Unit]
Description=Wake-on-LAN for <adapter>
Requires=network.target
After=network.target
[Service]
ExecStart=/usr/bin/ethtool -s <adapter> wol g
Type=oneshot
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target

1. Run the following command to enable the Wake-on-LAN service:

sudo systemctl enable wakeonlan.service 

Enabling Wake-on-LAN in openSUSE

1. Enter the BIOS of the client device, then enable Power on by PCIE.
2. Boot into the operating system, then open a terminal window and run the following command to install ethtool:

sudo zypper install ethtool 

1. Run the following command and note the name (for example, eth0 or enp5s0) and MAC address (for example, aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff) of the network adapter:

ip a 

1. Run the following command to check the Wake-on-LAN status of the network adapter, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool <adapter> | grep Wake 

1. If the Wake-on-LAN status is d, or disabled, run the following command to enable Wake-on-LAN, where is the name of the network adapter:

sudo ethtool -s <adapter> wol g 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/network/ 

sudo nano 50-wired.link 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where is the MAC address of the network adapter:

[Match]
MACAddress=<mac>
[Link]
NamePolicy=kernel database onboard slot path
MACAddressPolicy=persistent
WakeOnLAN=magic 

1. Run the following commands to open the Nano text editor:

cd /etc/systemd/system/ 

sudo nano wol.service 

1. In the Nano text editor, enter the following text, then press + to save your changes and + to close the Nano text editor, where
   is the name of the network adapter:

[Unit]
Description=Wake-on-LAN for <adapter>
Requires=network.target
After=network.target
[Service]
ExecStart=/usr/bin/ethtool -s <adapter> wol g
Type=oneshot
[Install]
WantedBy=multi-user.target

1. Run the following command to enable the Wake-on-LAN service:

sudo systemctl enable wakeonlan.service 

4.3.7 Event Log (software)

This item displays the event logs for the client devices of ASUS Control Center Express by clicking on the tabs for the various event log types. In each event log tab you may click on an event to view more details about the event.

You may also export the tables to a .csv file, or import an ACC CSM Event Log .csv file:

• To export the table click the Export button, enter a filename, then click Save.
  • To import an ACC CSM Event Log table, click the Import button, select the ACC CSM Event Log .csv file you wish to import, then click Open.

This item is software controlled and information available may differ with the hardware version. Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• DASH devices: Event Log (DASH)
• RTL8117 devices: Event Log (RTL8117)
• vPro devices: System Record (vPro)
• BMC devices: Event Log (BMC)

Clicking on a column header will sort the information alphabetically based on the items in that column.

Event log on Windows-based client devices

Select an event log type, then select a filter criteria from the Filter Type block and click Query.

Event log type	Monitor	Device-related events detected by Connection, Hardware, and Utilization sensors
	Application	Application-related events
	System	System-related events
	Security	Security-related events
Log level type	-	Ignore this filter
	Information	Information level events usually indicate an event which occurred without incident or issue
	Warning	Warning level events indicate potential issues which may not require immediate action
	Error	Error level events indicate loading or operation failures
	Critical	Critical level events indicate the most severe problems and may require immediate action
Filter by total records	Select the amount of events to display, or select “-” to ignore this filter
Filter by timestamp	Select the period of time to filter events, or select “-” to ignore this filter

Event log on Linux-based client devices

Select an event log type, then select a filter criteria from the Filter Type block and click Query.

Available event log types may vary depending on Linux distribution.

Event log type	authentication	Authentication-related events
	secure	Secure-related events
	boot	Boot-related events
	dmesg	Device driver-related events
	iptables	Kernel firewall-related events
	access	Access-related events
	mysql error	MySQL-related events
	mail	Mail-related events
	cron	Cron-related events
	daemon	Daemon-related events
	package	Package-related events
	kernel	Kernel-related events
	system	System-related events
Filter by total records Select the amount of events to display.

4.3.8 Remote Desktop (software)

The Remote Desktop function provides a flexible interface for device management through the desktop accessed in ASUS Control Center Express.

This section is intended for using Remote Desktop in Software mode. Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• RTL8117 devices: Remote Desktop (RTL8117)
  • vPro devices: Remote Desktop (vPro)
  • BMC devices: Remote Desktop (BMC)

The client device should be powered on and logged into an OS environment.

On Linux-based client devices:

• Remote desktop support may vary depending on Linux distribution.
• The agent should be updated to the latest version.
• A display device may need to be physically connected to the client device.

• The client device must be using a GNOME (Wayland) desktop environment.

• If prompted, select General to start Remote Desktop in software mode, or select KVM - 8117, KVM - vPro, or KVM - BMC to start Remote Desktop in hardware mode for the specified remote management controller.

Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Selection General KVM - 8117 Yes

1. After the connection is successful, you can select the remote desktop function or remotely control the connected device.

ASUS Control Center Express Quantity Recycle Subscription v1...

1. To end the remote control session, scroll to the top of the page, then click on Remote Desktop.

Remote Desktop Windows 8.1.1 - Default Windows 8.1.2 - Default Windows 8.1.3 - Default Windows 8.1.4 - Default Windows 8.1.5 - Default Windows 8.1.6 - Default Windows 8.1.7 - Default Windows 8.1.8 - Default Windows 8.1.9 - Default Windows 8.1.10 - Default Windows 8.1.11 - Default Windows 8.1.12 - Default Windows 8.1.13 - Default Windows 8.1.14 - Default Windows 8.1.15 - Default Windows 8.1.16 - Default Windows 8.1.17 - Default Windows 8.1.18 - Default Windows 8.1.19 - Default Windows 8.1.20 - Default Windows 8.1.21 - Default Windows 8.1.22 - Default Windows 8.1.23 - Default Windows 8.1.24 - Default Windows 8.1.25 - Default Windows 8.1.26 - Default Windows 8.1.27 - Default Windows 8.1.28 - Default Windows 8.1.29 - Default Windows 8.1.30 - Default Windows 8.1.31 - Default Windows 8.1.32 - Default Windows 8.1.33 - Default Windows 8.1.34 - Default Windows 8.1.35 - Default Windows 8.1.36 - Default Windows 8.1.37 - Default Windows 8.1.38 - Default Windows 8.1.39 - Default Windows 8.1.40 - Default Windows 8.1.41 - Default Windows 8.1.42 - Default Windows 8.1.43 - Default Windows 8.1.44 - Default Windows 8.1.45 - Default Windows 8.1.46 - Default Windows 8.1.47 - Default Windows 8.1.48 - Default Windows 8.1.49 - Default Windows 8.1.50 - Default Windows 8.1.51 - Default Windows 8.1.52 - Default Windows 8.1.53 - Default Windows 8.1.54 - Default Windows 8.1.55 - Default Windows 8.1.56 - Default Windows 8.1.57 - Default Windows 8.1.58 - Default Windows 8.1.59 - Default Windows 8.1.60 - Default Windows 8.1.61 - Default Windows 8.1.62 - Default Windows 8.1.63 - Default Windows 8.1.64 - Default Windows 8.1.65 - Default Windows 8.1.66 - Default Windows 8.1.67 - Default Windows 8.1.68 - Default Windows 8.1.69 - Default Windows 8.1.70 - Default Windows 8.1.71 - Default Windows 8.1.72 - Default Windows 8.1.73 - Default Windows 8.1.74 - Default Windows 8.1.75 - Default Windows 8.1.76 - Default Windows 8.1.77 - Default Windows 8.1.78 - Default Windows 8.1.79 - Default Windows 8.1.80 - Default Windows 8.1.81 - Default Windows 8.1.82 - Default Windows 8.1.83 - Default Windows 8.1.84 - Default Windows 8.1.85 - Default Windows 8.1.86 - Default Windows 8.1.87 - Default Windows 8.1.88 - Default Windows 8.1.89 - Default Windows 8.1.90 - Default Windows 8.1.91 - Default Windows 8.1.92 - Default Windows 8.1.93 - Default Windows 8.1.94 - Default Windows 8.1.95 - Default Windows 8.1.96 - Default Windows 8.1.97 - Default Windows 8.1.98 - Default Windows 8.1.99 - Default Windows 8.200 - Default

Remote desktop functions

You can adjust the different remote desktop functions such as image quality, screen size, and locations of function buttons.

- The remote desktop functions will differ between remote desktop in Software (General) or Hardware mode.

- The function button for Mouse display status is hidden by default and only shown if there are zero displays and one or more mice connected to the client device.

Quality	Adjust the remote desktop image quality.
Resize	Select between Window Size and Screen Size.
Set button position	Adjust the default position of the remote desktop functions on the screen.
Mouse display status	Select whether to show, hide, or automatically manage the visibility of the connected client's mouse cursor.
Exit	Exit the remote desktop and return to the ASUS Control Center Express main software.

4.3.9 BIOS

This item will allow you to adjust some BIOS settings such as Advanced, Boot, Monitor and Security of a single or multiple devices. It also allows you to update the BIOS of a single or multiple devices by uploading a BIOS file manually or from the BIOS Cache.

If you access the BIOS page from Device Information you will only be able to view, manage BIOS settings, or update the BIOS of the selected device. To view, manage BIOS settings, or update the BIOS of multiple devices, please navigate back to the main menu page, then select multiple devices and select Smart BIOS from the Select Function drop down menu.

This item is software controlled and information available may differ with the hardware version. Please refer to the following sections in the Management Functions chapter for information on the Hardware mode:

• RTL8117 devices: Smart BIOS (RTL8117)
• BMC devices: Smart BIOS (BMC)

Availability of this function may depend on BIOS support.

BIOS Flash Management

You can flash the BIOS by manually uploading a BIOS file or by selecting a previously flashed BIOS file from the BIOS cache. You may also remove BIOS files from the BIOS cache if needed.

Flashing BIOS by manually uploading BIOS file

Manually upload a BIOS file to flash the BIOS of the client device. The BIOS file uploaded and flashed with will be added to the BIOS Cache.

1. Select Manually Upload BIOS File in the BIOS Flash Type field.

This option will only appear if a single device was selected.

Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Manually Uploaded BIOS File Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse Flash Mode: Software Flash BIOS

2. Click on Browse to select a BIOS file.

• BIOS files for multiple devices need to be uploaded separately.
• The illustration below shows the options for multiple devices selected.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Setting Host Name Model Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date DESKTOP-BJN6055 VCE6-C 0807 04/12/2019 DESKTOP-SGS10EP Pro WS X570-ACE 2007 04/24/2020 Flash BIOS Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse VC83-C 0807 Pro WS X570-ACE 2010 Flash Mode Software Flash BIOS

3. Confirm that the BIOS file was successfully uploaded and click OK. The uploaded BIOS file will also be added to the BIOS Cache.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Setting Host Name Modal Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date DESKTOP-027N6USS VC65-C 0007 04/12/2019 DESKTOP-SG510EP Pro WS X570-ACE 2007 04/24/2020 Flash BIOS Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse VC65-C 0007 Pro WS X570-ACE 2010 Flash Mode Software Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Software version Build Date File Size VC65-C 0807 04/12/2019 16 MB VC65-C 0402 08/28/2018 16 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2010 06/03/2020 52 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2007 04/24/2020 52 MB

1. (for multiple devices) Select the BIOS you wish to flash on the devices selected from the drop down menu next to each model name.
2. Select your Flash Mode, then click on Flash BIOS.

Hardware Flash Mode is only available if the client device is connected using a management LAN port which supports remote management controller.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Setting Host Name Model Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date DESKTOP-B2760255 VCS-5-C 0807 04/12/2019 DESKTOP-SQS10EP Pro WS X570-ACE 2007 04/24/2020 Flash BIOS Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse VC65-C 0807 Pro WS X570-ACE 2010 Flash Mode Software Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Software version Build Date File Size VC65-C 0807 04/12/2019 16 MB VC65-C 0602 08/05/2018 16 MB

1. The client device will automatically be checked for potential issues that may affect the BIOS flashing procedure. Serious risk of data loss may occur if you proceed without resolving these issues. Carefully review the Status Check, BitLocker Risk, Auto Backup Risk, and fTPM Risk columns before proceeding.

• For Status Check issues, confirm if the ASUS Control Center Express agent on the client device is updated to version 1.6.3 or later.
• For BitLocker Risk issues, confirm if BitLocker is suspended on the client device. Proceeding anyway may trigger BitLocker encryption that is irreversible without the BitLocker recovery key.
• For fTPM Risk issues, confirm if fTPM is disabled on the client device. Proceeding anyway may irreversibly erase fTPM security data.
• For Auto Backup Risk issues, ASUS Control Center was not able to automatically backup the BitLocker recovery keys. It is strongly recommended to manually back up the BitLocker recovery keys before proceeding. Refer to Microsoft documentation on BitLocker for more information.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Settings Host Name Model Name Status Check BltLocker Risk FTPM Risk Auto Backup Risk DESKTOP-B9713D4 RDG STRIX Z690-F GAMING WIFI Done. DESKTOP-MQJ5VDA RDG STRIX Z690-F GAMING WIFI Done. DESKTOP-SG51DEP RDG STRIX Z690-A GAMING WIFI Done. Flash BIOS

1. If you would like to automatically shutdown the client device when the BIOS update is completed, please click Yes on the pop up window. If you would like to manually shutdown the client device click No.

If you selected Yes, the device will automatically shutdown after the update and this action will be reflected in the Mission Center.

If you selected No, the device will update the BIOS and the update result will appear in the Mission Center. Click on the update result in the Mission Center and click Shutdown to manually shutdown the device.

Flashing BIOS from the BIOS cache

You can select a BIOS file from the BIOS cache.

1. Select Flash from BIOS Cache in the BIOS Flash Type field.

This option will only appear if only a single device was selected.

1. An applicable BIOS file should be automatically selected, if you wish to select another BIOS file, click on the BIOS Cache List drop down menu. Ensure to select a BIOS file for all devices if you are updating the BIOS for multiple devices.
2. Select your Flash Mode, then click on Flash BIOS.

Hardware Flash Mode is only available if the client device is connected using a management LAN port which supports RTL 8117 LAN IC.

DESKTOP-SGS1DEF Pro WS-X570-ACE 2007 04/34/2020 Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Flash From BIOS Cache BIOS Cache List 2010 Flash Mode Software Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Software version Build Date File Size Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2010 06/03/2020 32 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2007 04/24/2020 32 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2003 03/06/2020 32 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 1302 01/20/2020 32 MB

1. The client device will automatically be checked for potential issues that may affect the BIOS flashing procedure. Serious risk of data loss may occur if you proceed without resolving these issues. Carefully review the Status Check, BitLocker Risk, Auto Backup Risk, and fTPM Risk columns before proceeding.

• For Status Check issues, confirm if the ASUS Control Center Express agent on the client device is updated to version 1.6.3 or later.
• For BitLocker Risk issues, confirm if BitLocker is suspended on the client device. Proceeding anyway may trigger BitLocker encryption that is irreversible without the BitLocker recovery key.
• For fTPM Risk issues, confirm if fTPM is disabled on the client device. Proceeding anyway may irreversibly erase fTPM security data.
• For Auto Backup Risk issues, ASUS Control Center was not able to automatically backup the BitLocker recovery keys. It is strongly recommended to manually back up the BitLocker recovery keys before proceeding. Refer to Microsoft documentation on BitLocker for more information.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Settings Host Name Model Name Status Check BltLocker Risk FTPM Risk Auto Backup Risk DESKTOP-B9713D4 RDG STRIX Z690-F GAMING WIFI Done. DESKTOP-MQJ5VDA RDG STRIX Z690-F GAMING WIFI Done. DESKTOP-SG51DEP RDG STRIX Z690-A GAMING WIFI Done. Flash BIOS

1. If you would like to automatically shutdown the client device when the BIOS update is completed, please click Yes on the pop up window. If you would like to manually shutdown the client device click No.

If you selected Yes, the device will automatically shutdown after the update and this action will be reflected in the Mission Center.

If you selected No, the device will update the BIOS and the update result will appear in the Mission Center. Click on the update result in the Mission Center and click Shutdown to manually shutdown the device.

Removing a BIOS file from the BIOS cache

You can view the BIOS files available for the client device in the BIOS Cache block. To remove a BIOS file from the BIOS Cache, check the BIOS file you wish to remove, then click on Remove.

Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Flash From BIOS Cache BIOS Cache List 2010 Flash Mode Software Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Software version Build Date File Size Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2010 06/03/2020 32 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2007 04/28/2020 52 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 2003 03/06/2020 52 MB Pro-WS-X570-ACE 1302 01/29/2020 52 MB Remove

BIOS Setting

Adjust the BIOS Advanced, Boot, Monitor and Security settings of a single client device, or multiple client devices.

• When the BIOS Setting function is initiated, you will be prompted for the BIOS password of the client device. If a password is not set, leave the field blank and press OK to continue.
• On client devices that support protected BIOS system environment variables, entering an incorrect password five times will lock the BIOS settings. If this occurs, restart the client device to unlock the BIOS settings.
• The BIOS settings may differ between client devices. Please refer to your client device's motherboard user manual for more information about navigating the BIOS and BIOS settings.
• When multiple devices are selected, only BIOS settings that are available on all devices will be displayed in the BIOS Setting tab. If there are different values or configurations between devices for the common options, the configuration will be displayed as a blank option.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management BIOS Settings Enable BIOS setting BIOS Settings Load Default Import Export Apply Advanced Security Device Support Enable Help: Enables or Disables BIOS support for security device. O.S. will not show Security Device. TCG EPI protocol and INTIA interface will not be available. TPM Status Enabled Help: Enable/Disable Security Device. NOTE: Your Computer will reboot during restart in order to change State of the Device. Legacy USB Support Enabled Help: Enables Legacy USB support. AUTO option disables legacy support if no USB devices are connected. DISABLE option will keep USB devices available only for EPI applications. HSP Headoff Disabled

BIOS Setting functions:

Please refer to the table below for the different functions you can use on the BIOS Setting page:

Enable BIOS setting	Enable the BIOS setting for a client device that has the BIOS setting disabled.
Load Default	Loads the default factory BIOS settings. When using this function, you will be required to enter the BIOS administrator password set for the client device.
Import Import the client device's BIOS settings.
Export	Export the client device's BIOS settings.
Apply	Applies the changes made in the BIOS Setting page to the BIOS of the client device. When using this function, you will be required to enter the BIOS administrator password set for the client device.

• Ensure to restart the client device if changes were made to the BIOS, or if the default BIOS settings were loaded for the changes to take effect.
• If the BIOS administrator password has not been set on the client device, please click on OK on the password prompt window without entering a password when using the Load Default and Apply functions.

BIOS Setting items:

Advanced	Configure the client device's advanced BIOS settings.
Boot	Configure the client device's BIOS boot settings.
Boot Priority	Configure the client device's BIOS boot priority.
Monitor	Configure the client device's BIOS monitoring settings.
Security	Configure the client device's BIOS password.

• If the client device does not have BIOS settings enabled, ASUS Control Center Express will not be able to display the BIOS settings of the client device. Please click on Enable BIOS setting, and restart the client device to configure the BIOS settings of the client device.
• You can enable, disable, or reorder items in the Boot Priority menu, if supported by the BIOS on the client device.

4.3.10 Installer

This item will allow you to download and update the driver, utility application, and BIOS for a single or multiple devices.

If you access the Installer page from Device Information you will only be able to download and update the driver, utility application, and BIOS of the selected device. To download and update the driver, utility application, and BIOS of multiple devices, please navigate back to the main menu page, then select multiple devices and select Software Management > Installer from the Select Function drop down menu.

• Ensure the main server is connected to the Internet and has a stable connection.
• Only BIOS updates are supported on Linux-based client devices.
• When selecting multiple devices, ensure that most devices selected are online (some devices may be offline), as the download and install process is only applied to online devices. If all devices selected are offline, you will be prompted with a message asking you to select online devices.
• ACCE will display the versions of drivers, utility applications, and BIOS already installed only when a single device is selected.

• ACCE will automatically check for updated or recommended drivers and utility applications for download and installation only when a single device is selected.

• On the Installer page, select if you would like to download from the Support CD or from the Official Website.

Installer Download Resources Support CD Official Website

Support CD	Downloads and installs drivers, applications, and BIOS from the latest Support CD version for the selected device(s).
Official Website	Downloads the recommended version of drivers and applications from the official website for the selected device(s).

2. Click the

Edit button to select a new download path. If unspecified, the will be used.

Installer C:\Program Files\06\ADOS\ADOS Control Center ExpressXPSO console\installer Download Download & Install Check all machines Uncheck all machines Clients Pro WS X570-ACE Pro WS X570-ACE VC85R VC85-C Model Name Connection Pro WS X570-ACE Online Check all Items Uncheck all Items Driver Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD Chipset Driver 19.10.16 No Win10(6+) Intel(R) Gigabit Ethernet Driver 12.15.184.1 No Win10(6+) Roatek Audio Driver 6.01.8646 No Win10(6+) Roatek LAN Driver 10.32.1206.2018 No Win10(6+) Utility Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD RAIDport2 Utility 9.20.105 Yes Win10(6+) AXUS AI Suite 3 1.00.52 No Win10(6+)

1. Select a model from the drop down menu, then select the client device(s) you wish to download software for.

Installer C:\Program Files\gb\ADUS\ADUS Control Center Express\pro console\installer Download Download & install Check all machines Uncheck all machines Clients Pro WB X570-ACE Pro WB X570-ACE VC85R VC85-C Model Name Connection Pro WS X570-ACE Online Check all Items Uncheck all Items Driver Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD Chipset Driver 19.10.1% No Win10(6+) Intel(R) Gigabit Ethernet Driver 12.15.184.1 No Win10(6+) Realtek Audio Driver 6.0.1.8666 No Win10(6+) Realtek LAN Driver 10.32.1206.2018 No Win10(6+) Utility Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD RAIDpart2 Utility 9.20.105 No Win10(6+) AXUS AI Suite 3 1.00.52 No Win10(6+)

1. If you selected Official Website as the download source, use the System dropdown list to select the operating system version.

Operating

This item only appears when Official Website is selected.

5. Select the software you would like to download, then click on Download or Download & Install.

• Download & Install is only available when Support CD is selected.
- Scroll down to view and select available drivers, utilities, and BIOS files. The items displayed may vary between device model.
- The Driver, Utility, and BIOS blocks will display items already installed, as well as recommended available updates.
- Drivers and utility applications marked Yes in the Manual installation is required column require manual installation on the client device (the installation files can be found in the download path you selected on the client device).
- Downloaded BIOS files on the main server will automatically be uploaded to the BIOS cache. Click BIOS Flash Management to update the BIOS after the download is complete.
- You can click Check all items to select all available downloads, or click Uncheck all items to clear the selection.
- The selected software will be downloaded to the specified download path on the ASUS Control Center Express main server.

Installer C:\Program Files (.db\)/ASLS/ASLS Control Center Express\apro console\installer Download Download & Install Check all machines Uncheck all machines Clients Pro WS X570-ACE Pro WS X570-ACE VC85R VC85-C Model Name Connection Pro WS X570-ACE Online Check all items Uncheck all items Driver Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD Chipset Driver 19.10.16 No Win10(64) Intel® Gigabit Ethernet Driver 12.15.184.1 No Win10(64) Realtek Audio Driver 6.0.1.8666 No Win10(64) Realtek LAN Driver 10.32.1206.2010 No Win10(64) Utility Software name Recommended Version Manual installation is required OS Information AMD MACD point Utility 9.28.105 Yes Win10(64) ASLS AI Suite 3 1.00.52 No Win10(64)

1. A status bar will display the download status. Click OK once the download is completed.

4.3.11 Device List

If you access the Device List page from Device Information you will only be able to view information for the selected client device. To view the device list for multiple client devices, please navigate back to the main menu page, then select multiple devices and select Device List from the Select Function drop down menu.

Device List on Windows-based client devices

Single device

Device List DESKTOP-SGS1/DBP Audio inputs and outputs ASUS VS228 (3- NVIDIA High Definition Audio) Digital Audio (S/PDIF) (5- High Definition Audio Device) Computer Disk driver Display adapters Firmware Human Interface Devices IDE ATA/ATAPI controllers

Multiple devices

Device List Host Name Username IP Address DESKTOP-ADN6USS N/A 192.168.0.18 DESKTOP-SGS10EP MS40 192.168.0.13

Clicking on a hardware device will allow you to view the details of the hardware device.

Device Map ASUS VS229 (3- NVIDIA High Definition Audio) GUID {c166523c-fe0c-4a94-a586-f1a80cfbbf3e}\0008 Hardware ID MMDEVAPI\AudioEndpoints Description ASUS VS229 (3- NVIDIA High Definition Audio) Enumerator SWD Driver Date 09/14/2018 Drivier Version 10.0.17763.1

Device List on Linux-based client devices

This item will allow you to view a list of PCI devices and devices connected to PCI subsystems.

Single device

Device List Device Class | Vendor ID | Device ID | Name 0x010601 0x1922 0x43eb 02:00.1 SATA controller: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD] S80 Series Chipset SATA Corp 0x020000 0x10ec 0x8168 01:30.0 Ethernet controller: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL8111/B108/B411 PCI Exp 0x030000 0x1902 0x1436 08:00.0 VGA compatible controller: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD/ATI] Renoir (rev d9) 0x040300 0x1902 0x1637 08:00.1 Audio device: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD/ATI] Renoir Radeon High Definiti 0x040300 0x1922 0x15e3 08:00.6 Audio device: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD] Family 17h/15th HD Audio Control

Multiple devices

Device List Host Name Username IP Address OS Information ace ace 192.168.0.106 Linux - Perdas GNU/Linux 23 (y... localhost:localdomain ace 192.168.0.104 Linux - openGUISE Loop TS.S[04]

Clicking on a hardware device will allow you to view the details of the hardware device.

Subsystem: ASUSTeK Computer Inc. Device 87e1 Flags: bus master, fast devsel, latency 0, IRQ 29 Memory at d0000000 (64-bit, prefetchable) [size=256M] Memory at e0000000 (64-bit, prefetchable) [size=2M] I/O ports at e000 [size=256] Memory at fcd00000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=512K] [virtual] Expansion ROM at 000c0000 [disabled] [size=128K]

Click switch between list and column view.

Device List Device Class | Vendor ID | Device ID | Name 0x010601 0x1022 0x43eb 02:00.1 SATA controller: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD] S80 Series Chipset SATA Cont 0x020000 0x10ec 0x8160 01:00.6 Ethernet controller: Realtek Semiconductor Co., Ltd. RTL8111/B166/B411 PCI Exp 0x030000 0x1062 0x1636 08:00.6 VGA compatible controller: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD/ATI] Renoir (rev d) 0x040300 0x1062 0x1637 08:00.1 Audio device: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD/ATI] Renoir Radeon High Definiti 0x040300 0x1022 0x15e3 08:00.6 Audio device: Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. [AMD] Family 17h/15th HD Audio Contr

4.3.12 System Restore

This item is only available on Windows-based client devices.

Select one or more client device(s) from the device list to create, restore from, and delete system restore points.

Refresh list (all selected devices) Delete system restore point (all selected devices) Create new system restore point (all selected devices) Restore from system restore point (all selected devices) System Restore Connection | Host Name | UserName | IP Address | Online | DESKTOP-SG51DEP | Administrator | 192.168.0.15 Online | DESKTOP-3AP41R7 | admin | 192.168.0.102 List of System Restore Points Date: Fount To DESKTOP-SG51DEP / 192.168.0.15 ( Online ) Creation Date Time | Description | Type | Sequence Number | 12/28/2022, 4:07:06 AM | system restore | 16 | 8 12/28/2022, 12:05:54 AM | My Restore3 | 16 | 7 12/27/2022, 11:35:24 PM | My Restore Point2 | 16 | 6 12/27/2022, 11:39:54 PM | My Restore Point | 16 | 5 Restore from system restore point (current device) Create new system restore point (current device) Delete system restore point (current device) Refresh list (current device)

• System restore will be enabled on the client device(s) if not already enabled.
• Create, delete, and restore functions are only available when the client device(s) are powered on and connected.
• Depending on network conditions, the list of system restore points may take some time to update. Click the ✕ refresh button to manually initiate an update.

Creating a system restore point

1. Click the Create button.
2. (Optional) Fill in the Restore Point Description field.
3. Click Create.

Deleting a system restore point

1. Select a system restore point from the system restore point list.
2. Click the Delete button.
3. Click Delete.

Restoring from a system restore point

1. Select a system restore point from the system restore point list.
2. Click the Restore button.
3. Tick the checkbox to automatically restart the client device(s) after the system restore is complete, then click Restore.

If this checkbox is not ticked, the client device(s) should be manually restarted after the system restore is complete.

4.3.13 BitLocker

This item is only available on Windows-based client devices.

Use this item to enable, disable, and suspend BitLocker, or manage BitLocker backups

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCE ed 192.108.0.104 Fully Encrypted BitLocker Backup Number : 10 Save Drive List (ACCE) Current 2024-04-03 03:48:09 Drive Conversion Status Encryption Percent... Keys C Fully Deropted N/A D: Encryption In Progress 1%....................................

Enabling BitLocker encryption

1. Select a device from the Device List, then click Enable.

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCEREL ad 192.168.0.104 Fully Encrypted Enable Disable Suspend

1. Select a drive and an encryption mode, then enter the encryption key and click Save.

BitLocker Encrypt Drive C Mode Passphrase Password Save Cancel

Disabling BitLocker encryption

1. Select a device from the Device List, then click Disable.

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCEREL ad 192.168.0.104 Fully Encrypted Enable Disable Suspend

1. Enter the decryption key, then click Save.

BitLocker Decrypt Drive C Key Save Cancel

Suspending BitLocker encryption

1. Click Suspend.

Suspending BitLocker encryption will suspend encryption for the entire drive, regardless of partition.

1. Fill in the Count field to set the amount of client device restarts before BitLocker encryption is automatically reenabled, then click Save.

As an example, if the Count field is set to 2, BitLocker will automatically be reenabled after the client device restarts twice.

1. Use the Mission Center to check if the task was completed successfully. Refer to the Mission Center section for more information.

Switching between BitLocker backup versions

Select a backup version from the drop-down list.

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCE a1 192.168.0.104 Fully Encrypted BitLocker Backup Number : 10 Save Drive List (ACCE) Current 2024-04-03 03:48:05

Changing the number of BitLocker backups

Enter the number of BitLocker backups, then click Save.

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCE ed 192.108.0.104 Pully Encrypted BitLocker Backup Number : 10 Save Enable Double Suspend

Refreshing the Device List

Select a device from the Device List, then click Refresh.

BitLocker Device list Host Name Username IP Address Status Check ACCEREL 192.168.0.104 Fully Encrypted Enable Disable Suspend BitLocker Backup Number: 10 Save Drive List (ACCE) Current 2024-04-03 03:48:09 Drive Conversion Status Encryption Percent... Keys C Fully Decrypted N/A D Encryption in Progress 1%

4.3.14 Report Generator

You can generate reports on the connection status, software installation history, and hardware information of the client device.

The information entered in this section is for reference only.

Connection Report

The Connection report will generate a report on the connection status of a single or multiple selected device(s).

You can enable or disable connection history recording for reports in Settings

Options > General Configuration under the Report Generator block.

To create a connection report on all devices click on 📄 at the top right menu bar, then select Connection. To create a connection report on multiple devices, select the devices you wish to create a connection report on from the Device Overview, then click on Select Function > Report Generator > Connection.

Report Generator Connection Date From To Type Generate Chart Generate Excel

Date	Set a date range to generate the report. If this field is left blank, a report will be generated on all the dates recorded on the main server.
Type	Select if you want to generate a report on Online Devices or Offline Devices.
Customize ( ≈ )	Select the metadata fields you would like to display on the report.
Add (+)	Add additional reports.
Delete ( □ )	Delete the selected generated chart and report information fields.
Generate Chart	Generate a line chart on the information entered or selected.
Generate Excel	Generate an Excel file on the information entered or selected.* The generated Excel file will not include line charts.

Generated Connection Report chart

Generated Connection Report Excel file

Software Report

The Software report will generate a report on the software installation history of a single or multiple selected device(s).

To create a software report on all devices click on 📄 located at the top right menu bar, then select Software. To create a software report on multiple devices, select the devices you wish to create a software report on from the Device Overview, then click on Select Function > Report Generator > Software.

Report Generator Software Sort by Date Options From To Software License Hotfix Generate Chart Generate Excel

Sort by	Select if you want to sort the generated report by Devices or by Software.Devices: Generate report based on the devices and shows the software installed on it.Software: Generate report based on the software and which devices have this software installed on it.
Date	Set a date range to generate the report. If this field is left blank, a report will be generated on all the dates recorded on the main server.
Options	Check Software License to generate a report only on Software License updates. Check Hotfix to generate a report only on hotfix updates. If this field is left blank, a report will be generated on all options.
Filter (▼)	Use the filter function to select which software you would like to generate a report on. If this field is left blank, a report will be generated on all software recorded on the main server.
Customize (÷)	Select the metadata fields you would like to display on the report.
Add (+)	Add additional reports.
Delete (○)	Delete the selected generated chart and report information fields.
Group	Filter the generated report by an existing group or add a new group to filter by. For more information on adding groups, please refer to the Creating client device groups of the Main Menu chapter.
Generate Chart	Generate a table on the information entered or selected.
Generate Excel	Generate a excel file on the information entered or selected.

Generated Software Report chart

Software Sort order Date Options Devices 2020/06/01 2020/07/08 Software License Hotia Device IP InstallDate Publisher SoftwareName Version 192.168.0.14 2020-06-18 Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Realtek High Definition Audio Driver 6.0.1.8393 192.168.0.14 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4549947 192.168.0.14 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4549949 192.168.0.18 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4506991 192.168.0.18 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4503308 192.168.0.18 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4506472 192.168.0.18 2020-06-18 NT AUTHORITY SYSTEM KB4509096 192.168.0.13 2020-02-13 philandro Software GmbH AnyOesk ad 5.4.2

Generated Software Report Excel file

Device:UFD 2010C258634\InNdcfs\2010002 2010026 2010012 2010031 2010032 2010033 2010034 2010035 2010036 2010037 2010038 2010039 2010040 2010041 2010042 2010043 2010044 2010045 2010046 2010047 2010048 2010049 2010050 2010051 2010052 2010053 2010054 2010055 2010056 2010057 2010058 2010059 2010060 2010061 2010062 2010063 2010064 2010065 2010066 2010067 2010068 2010069 2010070 2010071 2010072 2010073 2010074 2010075 2010076 2010077 2010078 2010079 2010080 2010081 2010082 2010083 2010084 2010085 2010086 2010087 2010088 2010089 2010090 2010091 2010092 2010093 2010094 2010095 2010096 2010097 2010098 2010134 2.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3. 3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3.3 3 VersionConnectionHost NameGO InformationIP AddressIP

Hardware Report

The Hardware report will generate a report on the hardware of a single or multiple selected device(s).

To create a hardware report on all devices click on 📋 located at the top right menu bar, then select Hardware. To create a hardware report on multiple devices, select the devices you wish to create a hardware report on from the Device Overview, then click on Select Function > Report Generator > Hardware.

Report Generator Hardware Sort by Generate Chart Generate Excel

Sort by	Select if you want to sort the generated report by Devices or by Hardware.Devices: Generate report based on the devices and shows the hardware installed on it.Hardware: Generate report based on the hardware and which devices have this hardware installed on it.
Filter (▼)	Use the filter function to select which hardware component you would like to generate a report on. If this field is left blank, a report will be generated on all hardware components recorded on the main server.
Customize (≡)	Select the metadata fields you would like to display on the report.
Add (+)	Add additional reports.
Delete (⊕)	Delete the selected generated chart and report information fields.
Group	Filter the generated report by an existing group or add a new group to filter by. For more information on adding groups, please refer to the Creating client device groups section of the Main Menu chapter.
Generate Chart	Generate a table on the information entered or selected.
Generate Excel	Generate a excel file on the information entered or selected.

Generated Hardware Report chart

Device IP	Class	Description	GUID	HMID
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Microsoft Radio Device Enumeration Bus	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0000
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Microsoft GS Wavetable Synth	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0001
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Bluetooth	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0002
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Microsoft Device Association Root Enumerator	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0003
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Wi-Fi	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0004
192.168.0.14	SoftwareDevice	Microsoft RRAS Root Enumerator	(62f9c741-b25a- 46ce-b54c- 9bccc08b6f2)/0005

Generated Hardware Report Excel file

12 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U W X Y Z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S

Chapter 5

This chapter describes the metadata management, software management, task scheduler, and hardware based management functions.

Managent Control

5.1 OOB Control

The OOB (Out of band) Control function ASUS Control Center Express provides allows one-to-many management of devices and also supports control of client device(s) with BMC, DASH, RTL8117, or vPro remote management controllers.

• To use the OOB Control functions, ensure the client device's motherboard supports BMC, DASH, RTL8117, or vPro remote management controller.
• Before using the OOB function on the client device, ensure that the remote management controller settings have been set in the client device's BIOS.

5.1.1 Setting remote management controller credentials

Before using the client device's OOB functions, please set up the login account and password ASUS Control Center Express will use to log into the client device's remote management controller. This will ensure the OOB remote functions are secure.

Please refer to the following methods for setting up the login information ASUS Control Center Express will use to log into the client device's remote management controller:

Setting the account and password in Settings (BMC, DASH, and vPro)

1. Click on , then navigate to Options > General Configuration, and scroll down to vPro Account, DASH Account and BMC Account.

- To set up a vPro controller, enter the account and password for the client device's remote management controller under vPro Account, then click Save.

MEBx is an Intel BIOS extension option and setting for Intel client devices. The account and password set for MEBx is not the Intel vPro remote management controller account and password.

- The password for vPro Account must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain one uppercase letter (A-Z), number (0-9), and one special character.

- The account and password entered should match the account and password already set on the client device.

- To set up a DASH controller, enter the account and password for the client device's remote management controller under DASH Account. You may choose to enter the port used for DASH, or enable/disable the TLS (Transport Layer Security). Click Save when you are finished.

• The account and password for DASH Account is limited to 15 characters.
• The account and password entered should match the account and password already set on the client device.

- To set up a BMC controller, enter the account and password for the client device's remote management controller under BMC Account. You may choose to enter the port used for BMC. Click Save when you are finished.

• The account for BMC Account must start with a letter (A-z), must contain at least one number (0-9), and is limited to 16 characters. The password must be at least 8 characters long.

• The account and password entered should match the account and password already set on the client device.

• After setting up the BMC Account, vPro Account, and/or DASH Account information, ASUS Control Center Express will automatically log into the client device's remote management controller. You can perform a scan in the Management Controller page to check the remote management controller login status for the client device(s).

If the default login account and password matches the client device's remote management controller match, the login status will be displayed as Login successful on the Management Controller page after executing a scan.

Management Controller Scan Scan IP range Select function Logon Status UUID IP Address M.C-model Name Description Login successful 70956D269204C0ABFE43E11G29A4C288 192.168.0.15 vpro PB60S Login successful 0073EE8C782FEAA311EAD639CBDDA230 192.168.0.17 Raultek RTJ8117 Pro WS X570-ACE Login successful DF71F465107C00B711E8ED99C786B04 192.168.1.100 Raultek RTJ8117 Pro WS VM480-ACE Login successful 000102030405060708090A080C3D070 192.168.1.105 DASH Pro B550M-C

The default account and password entered can be used to log into multiple client devices which have the same remote management controller account and password.

Setting the account and password through Management Controller

You can set the remote management controller log in account for ASUS Control Center Express for multiple client devices through the Management Controller page.

If a client device(s) with a remote management controller already has an agent deployed to it, you can also select the client device(s) from the devices list on the main menu page, then: click on Select Function > OOB - Control > Account Management > Set password for RTL8117 and vPro, or click on Select Function > OOB - Control > Account Management > Login for BMC and DASH.

1. Click on the perform a

Scan or Scan IP Range.

1. After the scan is completed, you can check if ASUS Control Center Express has successfully logged into the client device's remote management controller. If the account and password entered in ASUS Control Center Express does not match the client device's remote management controller account and password, Login failed will be displayed in the Login Status column.

Management Controller Scan IP range Select function Logon Status UUID IP Address MLC Model Name Description Login failed 192.168.0.101 vpro Login failed 192.168.0.17 Realtek RTL8117 Login failed 192.168.0.102 Realtek RTL8117 Login successful 0000102030405060706090A0B0C0D0F0 192.168.1.103 DASH Pro B550M-C

1. Select the client devices for which you would like to set the account and password ASUS Control Center Express will use to log into the client device's remote management controller.

When selecting multiple client devices to set the account and password, ensure that the selected client devices have the same remote management controller.

1. Depending on the remote management controller type, the steps for setting the account and password may differ slightly.

For RTL8117 and vPro

a. Click on Select Function > Account Management > Set password.
b. Enter the account and password ASUS Control Center will use to log into the client device's remote management controller, then click Save.

Set Password Account Name admin New Account optional Name ■ Password ............. New Password ............. Confirm ............. Password Save Cancel

MEBx is an Intel BIOS extension option and setting for Intel client devices. The account and password set for MEBx is not the Intel vPro remote management controller account and password.

• The password for vPro Account must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain one uppercase character (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and one special character.
• The password for RTL8117 must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain uppercase characters (A-Z), lower case characters (a-z), and numbers (0-9).

For BMC and DASH

a. Click on

Select Function > Account Management > Login.

b. Enter the account and password ASUS Control Center will use to log into the client device's remote management controller, then click Save.

Login Account Password Save Cancel

- You can also set the account and password for a single device with DASH remote management controller through Account Management on the Device Management Information page. For more information, please refer to the Account Management (DASH) section in this chapter.

- If the client device selected has multiple BMC or DASH remote management controller accounts you can switch accounts through OOB - Control > Account Management > Login.

1. You can view the status and results of setting the account and password in the Mission Center.

Login IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Message 192.168.1.105 0000102030405980708090a0b0c0d0f0 Success Mission Center Logus a few messages ago 100% OK

1. After the account and password has been set, ASUS Control Center Express will log into the client device's remote management controller. If the login is successful, Login successful will be displayed in the Login Status column and the client device's remote management controller and device name will also be displayed.

Management Controller Scan Scan IP Range Select function Logon Status UUD IP Address M.C.Model Name Description Login successful 7D996D269204CDA8FE43E11029A4C288 192.168.0.101 vpro PBMS Login failed 192.168.0.17 Realtek RTJ8117 Login failed 192.168.0.102 Realtek RTJ8117 Login successful 0000102030405060T08090AD800CD0F0 192.168.1.103 DASH Pro 855CM-C

1. For client devices with BMC or DASH remote management controllers, you can also check which account has been logged in on the Device Management Information page.

Setting the account and password through Management Control Information of a single device

You can set the remote management controller log in account for ASUS Control Center Express for a single client device through the Management Control Information page.

If a client device(s) with a remote management controller already has an agent deployed to it, you can also select the client device(s) from the devices list on the main menu page, then click on Select Function > OOB - Control > Account Management > Set password for RTL8117 and vPro, or click on Select Function > OOB - Control > Account Management > Login for BMC and DASH.

1. To enter the Management Control Information page you can either

- On the main menu page, click on in the M.C. column of the device you would like to enter the Management Control Information of.

To use this method, the client device should already have an agent deployed to it.

- Clickon then perform a

Scan or Scan IP Range, then click on

in the M.C column of the device you would like to enter the Management Control Information of.

- Enterthe Device Information page of a device, then toggle the Mode to Hardware.

1. If the login account and password ASUS Control Center Express is using to log into the client device's remote management controller do not match, a pop-up message should show up:

Warning Server and remote management controller account and password might be mismatched. Please reset the account and password of the client's remote management controller on ACC Express OK

1. Depending on the remote management controller type, the pop up window for setting the account and password may differ slightly.

For RTL8117 and vPro

Enter the account and password ASUS Control Center will use to log into the client device's remote management controller, then click Save.

Set Password Account Name admin New Account optional Name Password ............. New Password ............. Confirm ............. Password Save Cancel

For BMC and DASH

Enter the account and password ASUS Control Center will use to log into the client device's remote management controller, then click Save.

Login Account Password Save Cancel

1. You can view the status and results of setting the account and password in the Mission Center. If the account and password setting was successful and the account and password match, ASUS Control Center should automatically log into the client device's remote management controller, and also allow you to begin using the OOB - Control functions.

- You can also set the account and password for a single device with DASH remote management controller through Account Management on the DASH Device Management Information page. For more information, please refer to the Account Management (DASH) section in this chapter.

- MEBx is an Intel ^ BIOS extension option and setting for Intel ^ client devices. The account and password set for MEBx is not the Intel ^ vPro remote management controller account and password.

- The password for vPro Account must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain one uppercase character (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and one special character.

- The password for RTL8117 must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain uppercase characters (A-Z), lower case characters (a-z), and numbers (0-9).

5.1.2 Using OOB - Control functions

To use the OOB - Control functions you can either:

- Select the client device(s) you would like to execute OOB - Control functions on, then click on Select Function > OOB - Control and select a function to use.

- Clickon then form a

Scan or Scan IP Range, select the client

device(s) you would like to execute OOB - Control functions on, then click on Select Function and select a function to use.

Please see the table below for the list of the OOB - Control functions available for the different remote management controllers:

Functions List BMC DASH				RTL8117	vPro
Power Control	Power On (G0/S0)	VVVV
	Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	VVVV
	Power Off - Hard (G3)	VVV
	Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	VVVV
	Sleep - Deep (G1/S3)		V		V
	Master Bus Reset		V		V
	Hibernate (G1/S4)		V		V
	Restart Computer to BIOS				V
	Power On to BIOS				V
	Restart Computer to IDE-R Floppy				V
	Power On to IDE-R Floppy				V
	Restart Computer to IDE-R CDROM				V
	Power On to IDE-R CDROM				V
	Sleep - Light (G1/S2)		V
	Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	V	V
	Diagnostic Interrupt (NMI)		V
	Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)		V
	Power Off - Hard Graceful (G3)		V
	Master Bus Reset Graceful		V
	Power Cycle (Graceful Soft Off) (G2/S5)		V
	Power Cycle (Graceful Hard Off) (G3)		V
WatchDog	WatchDog Enable			V
	WatchDog Disable			V
BIOS	Smart BIOS - BIOS update management	V		V
	Smart BIOS - User profile	V
	Clear CMOS	V		V
Account Management	Set Password			V	V
	Login	V	V

(continued on the next page)

Functions List BMC DASH				RTL8117	vPro
System	Restart service			V
	Sync OEM port	V
KVM	KVM Remote Multi-display			V
	KVM Local Multi-display			V
	KVM Remote Single-display			V
	KVM Enable				V
	KVM Disable			V	V
	KVM Password				V
USBRedirection	USB Redirection		VVV
	Enable USB Redirection				V
	Disable USB Redirection				V
Firmware Update		V		V
Trust Zone				V
Certificate Management					V
System TrapAlert	Enable Trap Alert		V		V
	Enable Trap Alert - Info		V		V
	Enable Trap Alert - Warning		V		V
	Enable Trap Alert - Error		V		V
	Disable Trap Alert		V		V
IPMI	IPMI Tool Lanplus Command Redirect	V
	FRU Info. Write	V
Settings		V
Configuration		V
OOB - Control Help		VVVV

Function descriptions

Power Control	Execute power actions on the selected device(s) through the remote management controller.
WatchDog	Enable or disable WatchDog of selected RTL8117 device(s).
BIOS	Use the Smart BIOS function, clear CMOS through BMC, or manage BIOS user profile data for supported device(s).
Account Management	Set the login account and password ASUS Control Center Express will use to login into the RTL8117, vPro, BMC, or DASH remote management controller for selected device(s).
System	Set the port used for BMC; or restart the RTL8117 services of the selected device(s).
KVM	Set the RTL8117 KVM display mode; vPro KVM enable, disable, or password setting for selected device(s).

(continued on the next page)

Function descriptions

USB Redirection	Use the USB redirection function of the selected RTL8117, DASH, or vPro device(s); or enable or disable the USB redirection function for selected RTL8117 and vPro device(s).
Firmware Update	Update the BMC or RTL8117 firmware for selected device(s).
Trust Zone	Set the main server IP addresses which are allowed to perform RTL8117 function operations on client devices.
Certificate Management	Manage the certificates for selected vPro device(s).
System Trap Alert	Set the system Trap Alert level, or enable or disable Trap Alert for DASH and vPro device(s).
IPMI	Configure command redirection; or write information from the FRU(s) on selected BMC device(s).
Settings	Configure settings for selected BMC device(s).
Configuration	Backup, restore, or factory reset configuration settings for selected BMC device(s).
OOB - Control Help	View information about OOB functions supported by the selected device(s).

• OOB - Control functions are a collection of BMC, DASH, RTL8117, and vPro remote management controller functions. If a selected device does not support a selected OOB - Control function, you can view the details and results of the action in the Mission Center.
• Selected OOB - Control functions may not be able to be executed together due to differences between the remote management controllers, for example, USB Redirection function for vPro cannot be executed at the same time as the USB Redirection function for DASH or RTL8117.
• The USB redirection function for DASH and vPro does not support NTFS format USB devices.
• When using the USB redirection function for vPro, the client device will be displayed as Floppy Disk A, CD Drive (drive code) when successfully mounted.
• When using the KVM remote desktop function of a vPro device, the border of the client device screen will flash red and yellow to indicate that the client device is currently running the KVM remote desktop function.
• Ensure that port 162 is opened before enabling system trap alerts.
• You can add or edit remote management controller notifications in Notification Rule. The Event Log on the dashboard will display the system Trap Alert notifications you have set.

• When selecting multiple client devices to set the account and password, ensure to select client devices with the same remote management controller.
• The KVM password must contain 8 characters, and must contain uppercase characters (A-Z), lowercase characters, numbers (0-9), and special characters.
• Ensure the client device's RTL8117 is enabled if it uses RTL8117 for remote management control, and this is a new machine which is used for the first time or has been reset to factory settings. In the device's BIOS, navigate to Advanced > RTL8117 setting, then enable RTL8117.
• If an agent has been deployed to the client device, you can also enable the client device's RTL8117 management controller through the BIOS setting function of ASUS Control Center Express.
• You cannot update the RTL8117 remote management controller firmware if KVM is enabled. If you wish to update the RTL8117 remote management controller firmware please disable KVM first.

5.2 Management Control Overview

The Management Control options allow you to manage a client device remotely which is connected via a management LAN port, supports a remote management controller, and also allows out-of-band management.

To access Management Control, click on 📋 located at the top right menu bar.

Management Controller Scan Scan IP range Select function UUID IP Address M.C Model Name Description 0189712657C#A12F1BA23M#E5A2612B T8Z.168.0.11 Raddie 8TLE81 TF Pio WS X5TD-ACE

5.2.1 Scanning for devices

You can scan for client devices which support the Management Control functions by clicking on Scan or Scan IP range. Clicking on a device from the scan results will redirect you to the Management Control Information page.

For more information on scanning an IP range, please refer to the Scanning an IP range section of the Agent Deployment chapter.

5.2.2 Devices with multiple remote management controllers

If the client device supports multiple remote management controllers, you can use ASUS Control Center Express to quickly switch between remote management controllers.

Selecting a management controller via Management Control

1. Click on Management Control in the menu bar of the main control panel, then click Scan. The detected remote management controller type will be displayed in the M.C column.
2. Select the entry corresponding to the desired remote management controller to open the Management Control Information page, or click Select function to execute an OOB - Control function.

Management Controller Scale IP range Select function Login Status UID IP Address M.C-model Name Description Login successful 09000000070006100500040003000/00 192.168.0.5T BMC Pro WS WY80M-ACE SI Login successful 09000000070006100500040003000/00 192.168.0.5D vpro Pro WS WY80M-ACE SI

If the Login Status field shows "Login failure", please refer to the Setting remote management controller credentials section in this chapter to set the account and password or log into the remote management controller of the indicated device.

Selecting a management controller via Device Information

Select a device from the device list on the main menu to open the Device Information screen, then select the desired remote management controller from the Mode drop down menu.

Device Information Mode Software Software BMC vPro DESKTOP-E8R0P64 Hardware Sensor OS Information Win10(64) Utilization

Selecting a management controller via the device list

Select the icon corresponding to the desired remote management controller in the M.C column of the device list on the main menu, or click Select function to execute an OOB - Control function.

Convertible Abox Light Unit Off Information IP Address New Sensor Userdata Motor Name MCC BIOV Version Online DENTOPULISIPAM Administrator Wit1(60) 192 198.0.50 Normal Normal Pro WS WINSINAVOC SE 2026 Online LABXST-4P30 LAB-DE1-0070 Wit1(64) 192 198.1.190 Normal Warning Pro OSTRUMC 2023 Online LABXST-0077 LAB-SUF-0077 Wit1(66) 192 198.1.191 Normal Warning Pro BSSIM-C 2023 Online LANTID-8MC LAL-2/5G-2010 Wit1(64) 192 198.1.192 Normal Warning Pro WS WTRNE-SAGE SE 2021 Online LABXST-BMC LAB-DE1-0059 Wit1(64) 192 198.1.193 Normal Warning Pro WS WTRNE-SAGE SE 2021 0021 0021

The vPro icon may not be visible if the IP address of the vPro remote management controller has been changed. To update the vPro IP address, click Device Information > Control > Set Management Controller, then restart the device.

Selecting a remote management controller for an offline device

Select a device from the device list on the main menu to open the Device Information screen, then select the desired function and management controller.

Please select the management controller to execute: Realtek RTL8117 DASH BMC vPro OK Cancel

• Hardware Sensor requires a BMC, DASH, or RTL 8117 controller.
• USB Redirection requires a DASH, RTL 8117, or vPro controller.
  • Power requires a vPro controller.
• Remote Desktop requires a BMC, RTL 8117, or vPro controller.

5.3 Management Control Information

The Management Control Information provides you with detailed information about your selected client device, and also provides you with some hardware controlled management functions such as power control options for devices which do not have an OS installed yet.

The Management Control Information for DASH, vPro, RTL8117, and BMC may differ from each other.

• For DASH, please refer to Management Control Information (DASH).
• For RTL8117, please refer to Management Control Information (RTL8117).
• For vPro, please refer to Management Control Information (vPro).
• For BMC, please refer to Management Control Information (BMC).

To access Management Control Information of a client device, please refer to one of the following methods:

• Classic view: Click on a client device in the device list, then select Hardware in the Mode dropdown menu, or click on ■ in the M.C column of the Devices List.
• Graphical view: Double click on a client device shortcut icon, then select Hardware in the Mode dropdown menu.
• Management Control: Click on a client device in the scan results of the Management Control screen.

• Some options are only available when the client device is online and logged into the OS.
• You will not be able to toggle between Hardware and Software mode if you accessed the Management Control Information page through Management Control or by clicking on in the M.C column of the Devices List on the main menu page.
• This chapter is only for the Hardware Mode options, for Software Mode options, please refer to Chapter 4 Device Information.

Remote Management Controller support on the motherboard is required for Management Control Information.

5.4 Management Control Information (DASH)

The DASH Management Control Information allows you to monitor the hardware status, remote power control, USB redirection, console redirection, or view the hardware assets while the client device is offline.

The functions in this section are hardware controlled and values may differ with the software version. Please refer to the Device Information chapter for more information on Software mode.

The client device needs to support DASH remote management controller, and DASH function needs to be enabled in the client device's BIOS settings.

Toggle between Software and Client device details Device Mode* Management Control Information 0000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0f0 Login User Administrator Login Status Login successful Management Controller DASH Model Name Pro B550M-C IP Address 192.168.1.104 Base Desktop and Mobile 1.0.2 CPU 1.0.1 Boot Control 1.0.2 Power State Management 1.0.2 Indications 1.0.0 System Memory 1.0.1 Software Inventory 1.0.1 Sensors 1.0.2 Fan 1.0.1 Power Supply 1.0.1 Physical Asset 1.0.2 Simple Identity Management 1.0.0 Mode Hardware Hardware Sensor Inventory Control USB Redirection Network Text Redirection Account Management Event Log

* This item will not be available if you accessed the Management Control Information page through Management Control.

Device icon	Displays the connection status of the client device's DASH remote management controller.
Login user	Displays the user account currently logged into the client device's DASH remote management controller. The login user can be switched.
Login Status	Displays the current login status to the client device's DASH remote management controller.

(continued on the next page)

Management Controller	Displays the remote management controller of the client device.
Model Name	Displays the model name of the client device.
IP Address	Displays the IP address of client device.
Profile versions	Displays the version information for the different profiles of the client device's DASH. This information may vary depending on the support of the client device's DASH remote management controller.

5.4.1 Hardware Sensor (DASH)

This item allows you to view the voltage, temperature, and fan rotation information of the client DASH device.

Hardware Sensor Refresh Time Stop Voltage CPU Voltage 8.000 V 3.3V Voltage 8.000 V 5V Voltage 8.000 V 12V Voltage 8.000 V Temperature CPU TEMPERATURE 31.000 °C CPU TEMPERATURE 30.000 °C CPU TEMPERATURE 30.000 °C

Refresh Time	Set the refresh time interval for the Hardware Sensor.
Voltage	Displays the voltage of the device hardware.
Temperature	Displays the temperature of the device hardware.
Fan	Displays the fan rotation speed of the device hardware.

5.4.2 Inventory (DASH)

This item allows you to view system product, model, CPU version, BIOS version, memory, and other hardware information.

Inventory Mode Hardware System Dedicated Desktop EnabledState Enabled IdentifyingDescriptions CIMGUID OtherIdentifyingInfo 0F0E0DC0B0A090879605043020100 PrimaryOwnerContact ManagedSystem PrimaryOwnerName SysAdmin RequestedState No Change Power Status Current Status On PowerChangeCapabilities Power State Settable

5.4.3 Control (DASH)

This item allows you to set or change the client DASH device's password, and also allow you to execute power control operations.

Control Power Control -Please Select-- Login Login Boot Order Setting Boot Config Setting Alert Indication Setting

Power Control

Allows you to remotely execute power control functions on the client device through the DASH remote management controller, such as a system restart.

Power Control --Please Select-- --Please Select-- Power On (G0/S0) Power Off - Soft (G2/S5) Power Off - Hard (G3) Power Cycle - Soft Off (G2/S5) Sleep - Deep(G1/S3) Master Bus Reset Hibernate (G1/S4) Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3) Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5) Master Bus Reset Graceful Power Cycle (Graceful Soft Off) (G2/S5)

Power On (G0/S0)	Power on the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Off - Hard (G3)	Force the client device to power off through the DASH remote management controller when the OS is unresponsive.
Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Restart the client device after shutting down from the OS through the DASH remote management controller.
Sleep - Deep (G1/S3)	Set the client device to enter sleep mode (G1/S3) through the DASH remote management controller.
Master Bus Reset	Resetting the hardware of the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Hibernate (G1/S4)	Set the client device to enter hibernate mode (G1/S4) through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	Powering off and restarting the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS of the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Master Bus Reset Graceful	Normal shut down and resetting the hardware of the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Cycle (Graceful Soft Off) (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS then restarting the client device through the DASH remote management controller.

Login

Allows you to set the account and password ASUS Control Center Express will use to log into the client device's DASH remote management controller. After successfully logging in, the DASH remote management controller will automatically switch to the newly logged in account.

Login Account Password Save Cancel

Boot Order

Allows you to set the client device's boot order through the DASH remote management controller.

You can readjust the ordering by left-clicking and holding the item you wish to adjust the order of, then dragging it up or down to readjust the boot order.

Boot Order CIM:Windows Boot Manager:0 CIM:SATA6G_3: HFS256G32TND-N210A:1 CIM:Realtek Boot Agent:2 Set Default One Change Save Cancel

Boot Config

Allows you to set the client device's boot settings through the DASH remote management controller.

Boot Config Windows Boot Manager Enabled SATA6G_3: HFS256G32TND- N210A Enabled Realtek Boot Agent Enabled Set Default Save Cancel

Alert Indication

Allows you to set the client device's DASH platform event alert indications.

• The Alert Indication categories you can set may vary depending on the support of the client device's DASH remote management controller.
• You can add or edit remote management controller notification rules from Rule Management, for more information on Rule Management, please refer to 8.1.2 Rule Management. Once the rule has been set, the Event Log on the Dashboard will show the event log.

Alert Indication INFO Disabled HW Disabled USER Disabled WARNING Disabled ERROR Disabled ALL Disabled Save Cancel

5.4.4 USB Redirection (DASH)

This item allows you to redirect a USB storage device or image file of a client DASH device.

• This item is not supported if the main server is running on Linux.
• This item is only supported on Windows-based client devices.
• Before using the USB Redirection function, ensure the USB storage device function has been enabled on the client device.
• The USB redirection function for DASH does not support NTFS format USB devices.

USB Redirection IP Address | UUID | PID | Message | Type | Path 192.160.0.17 0073ee8c782fsea311ead679cbdda230 1544 Ready for communication IMG C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\New Fi Share Image Share Drive Share URL Path C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\New File\ACCE Demo\ISO\Win10 Setup.iso

USB and device information	The USB Redirection list displays the IP address and other information about the device the USB is connected to.
Share Image	Select an image file you wish to mount onto the client device.
Share Drive	Allow the client device access to a selected USB storage device connected to the main server device.
Share URL	Copy the path or link to an image file you wish to mount onto the client device.
Image Path	The path of your redirected USB device or image file

Share Image

Allows you to share an Image file.

1. Check Share Image.
2. Select the image file you wish to mount, then click Mount in the File Picker window.
3. If the image file is successfully mounted, Ready for communication will be displayed in the Message column.

Share Drive

Allows you to share a USB storage device.

1. Check Share Drive, and ensure the remote device's USB function is enabled.
2. Select the USB storage device you wish to mount.
3. If the USB storage device is successfully mounted, Ready for communication will be displayed in the Message column.

Share URL

Allows you to share an image file URL.

1. Check Share URL.
2. Enter the URL of the image file, then click Mount.
3. If the image file is successfully mounted, Ready for communication will be displayed in the Message column.

5.4.5 Network (DASH)

This item allows you to set the wired and wireless network settings of the client DASH device.

Network Wired Interface Settings DHCP Enabled but Offline Default Gateway 192.168.1.1 IP Address 192.168.1.104 Subnet Mask 255.250.250.9 Edit

DHCP	Displays the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) state.
Default Gateway	Displays the default gateway.
IP Address	Displays the IP address.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnet mask.

Network Settings

You can only configure the network settings if the client device has not booted into OS. Once the client device has booted into OS, you can only view the network settings and will not be able to configure the settings.

TCP/IP Automatically use DHCP server Static IP address IP Address 192.168.1.104 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 192.168.1.1 Save Cancel

Client IP	Select to use Static IP address, or Automatically use DHCP server for the client device's IP.
IP Address	Allows you to set the IP address.
Subnet Mask	Allows you to set the subnet mask.
Default Gateway	Allows you to set the default gateway.

5.4.6 Text Redirection (DASH)

This item allows you to redirect a keyboard or console of a client DASH device through the BIOS settings.

Before using the Text Redirection function, ensure to complete the COM Port settings for Serial Port Console Redirection connection in the client device's BIOS.

Select the connection method between Telnet or SSH.

Select the character encryption between UTF-8 or ASCII.

Select the resolution of the console.

Select if the next reboot will be a normal boot, or set a hotkey for powering on.

5.4.7 Account Management (DASH)

This item allows you to add, delete, enable, or disable a DASH remote management controller account.

Account Add Username Role Count Active Administrator 3 ✓ test 2 ✓

Adding a new account

1. Click on Add.
2. Enter the information of the new account, then click Save.

Account Username e.g. user-01 Password e.g. ****** Confirm Password e.g. ****** Role Name ■ Admin ■ Redirection ■ Basic Cancel Save

Username	Enter the username.
Password	Enter the password.
Confirm Password	Re-enter the password.
Role Name	Select the role for the account.

The account and password for the DASH remote management controller is limited to 15 characters.

After setting the account and password, ASUS Control Center will log into the client device's remote management controller. If the login is successful, Login successful will be displayed in the Login Status on the Management Controller Information page.

Enabling, disabling, or deleting a new account

Only newly added accounts can be deleted. The default administrator account can only be edited and cannot be deleted.

1. Click on the account you would like to enable, disable or delete from the Account list.
2. Click on Enable, Disable, or Delete.
3. You can view the results of your action (Enable, Disable, or Delete) in the Mission Center.

Account Username test Role Name Admin Redirection Basic Enable Disable Delete Cancel

5.4.8 Role privileges (DASH)

This item allows you to manage role privileges of a DASH account. To access Role privileges, click on the Role Count of the account you would like to manage role privileges of.

Account Add Username Role Count Active Administrator 3 ✓ Text 2 ✓

Role Privilege Add Role Name Applied Count Admin 3 Redirection 3 Basic 18

Adding a new role

1. Click on Add located at the top right of the Role Privilege page.
2. Enter the Role Name.
3. Check the privileges the new role will have from the Privilege Configuration list.
4. Click Save once you are finished.

Role Privilege Role Name Role Name Profile Registration Base Desktop and Mobile Simple Identity Management Role Based Authorization BIOS Management Boot Control System Memory CPU DHCP Client Fan Privilege Configuration Cancel Save

Editing or deleting a role

Only newly added roles can be deleted. The default administrator role can only be edited and cannot be deleted.

1. Click on the role you would like to edit or delete.
2. You may edit the role name and role privileges, or click Delete to delete the role.
3. If you chose to edit the role, click on Save once you are finished.

Role Privilege Role Name Basic ✓ Profile Registration ✓ Base Desktop and Mobile ■ Simple Identity Management ■ Role Based Authorization ✓ BIOS Management ✓ Boot Control ✓ System Memory ✓ CPU ✓ DHCP Client ✓ Fan Privilege Configuration Delete Cancel Save

5.4.9 Event Log (DASH)

This item allows you to view system issues or problems of the client DASH device.

• The event categories displayed will vary depending on support of the DASH remote management controller.
• You can add or edit remote management controller notification rules from Rule Management. For more information on Rule Management, please refer to the Rule Management section of the Settings chapter. Once the rule has been set, the Event Log on the Dashboard will show the event log.

Event Log INFO HW.USER(WARNING ERROR ALL Date Time�Message 2021.02.18 15:09:27 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.18 15:09:26 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.18 15:09:25 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.17 16:52:44 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.17 16:52:44 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.17 16:52:43 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.17 16:52:42 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.05 16:19:49 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.05 16:19:48 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.05 16:19:47 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.05 16:19:46 Starting cache initialization 2021.02.04 13:10:59 Starting baseboard or motherboard initialization 2021.02.04 13:10:58 Starting cache initialization

5.5 Management Control Information (RTL8117)

The RTL8117 Management Control Information allows you to monitor the hardware status, and perform functions through the RTL8117 remote management controller when there is no OS installed on the client device, or when you cannot enter the OS of the client device.

The functions in this section are hardware controlled and values may differ with the software version. Please refer to Chapter 4 for more information on Software mode.

• The client device needs to support RTL8117 remote management controller.
• Ensure the client device's RTL8117 is enabled if this is a new machine which is used for the first time or has been reset to factory settings. In the device's BIOS, navigate to Advanced > RTL8117 setting, then enable RTL8117.

Device icon Edit device name Client device details Management Control Information 0900080007000600050040003000200 Edit device name Toggle between Software and Hardware Mode* Mode Hardware Login User Administrator Login Status Login successful Management Controller Realtek RTL8117 Model Name Pro WS W480-ACE IP Address 192.168.0.101 Up Time 1d 04h 27min 2Ts Firmware Version 0114_20200706 Kernel Version 4.4.18 U-Boot Version 2017.09 Hardware Sensor Inventory Control Remote Desktop USB Redirection Smart BIOS Firmware Update

* This item will not be available if you accessed the Management Control Information page through Management Control.

Machine Name	Displays the machine name. Click on [RE] to edit the machine name (max. character limit of 32 characters).
Device icon	Click on the device icon to view the event log of this device.
Login User	Displays the user account currently logged into the client device's RTL8117 remote management controller.

(continued on the next page)

Login Status	Displays the current login status to the client device's RTL8117 remote management controller.
Management Controller	Displays the remote management controller of the client device.
Model Name	Displays the model name of the client device.
Up Time	Displays the up time of the client device the previous session.
Firmware Version	Displays the firmware version of client device's RTL8117 remote management controller.
Kernel Version	Displays the kernel version of client device's RTL8117 remote management controller.
U-Boot Version	Displays the U-Boot version of client device's RTL8117 remote management controller.

5.5.1 Hardware Sensor (RTL8117)

This item allows you to view threshold value for items such as voltage, temperature, and fan values of the previous time the device was powered on.

The RTL8117 hardware sensor will only update the data while the client device is in the powering on process (when the client device is restarting).

Hardware Sensor Mode Hardware Voltage CPU Core Voltage 1.417 V CPU SOC Voltage 1.016 V +12V 12.006 V +5V 5.120 V +3.3V 3.328 V DRAM Voltage 1.200 V 1.8V PLL Voltage 1.808 V 1.60V SB Voltage 0.985 V Temperature

Voltage	Displays the voltage of the device hardware.
Temperature	Displays the temperature of the device hardware.
Fan	Displays the fan rotation speed of the device hardware.

5.5.2 Inventory (RTL8117)

This item displays the client device's hardware details from the previous time the client device was powered on.

Inventory Mode Hardware Base board Model Name Pro WB X570-ACE Serial Number MB-1234567890 Asset Tag Default string Manufacturer ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. System Product Name System Product Name Manufacturer System manufacturer

Base board	Displays the motherboard model, serial number, asset tag, and manufacturer information.
System	Displays the product name and manufacturer information.
Memory	Displays the memory location and capacity.
BIOS	Displays the BIOS issue date, version, and manufacturer information
Processor	Displays the processor name and clock information.

5.5.3 Control (RTL8117)

This item allows you to manage and control hardware level functions for scenarios where the client may not have an OS installed or cannot enter the OS.

Some functions may require you to restart the client device for the changes to take effect.

Control Power Control -Please Select-- -Please Select-- Power On (G0/S0) Power Off - Soft (G2/S5) Power Off - Hard (G3) Power Cycle - Soft Off (G2/S5) Heartbeat Interval 10 WatchDog Disable Clear CMOS Clear CMOS Set Password Set Password Restart Service Restart Serv... KVM Local multi-display

Power On (G0/S0)	Power on the client device through the RTL8117 remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off the client device through the DASH remote management controller.
Power Off - Hard (G3)	Force the client device to power off through the DASH remote management controller when the OS is unresponsive.
Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Restart the client device after shutting down from the OS through the DASH remote management controller.
Heartbeat Interval*	Allows you to set the time interval in seconds for which the hardware signals are checked.

(continued on the next page)

Watchdog*	Enable or disable the Watchdog monitoring function.
		If the Watchdog function is enabled and the client device triggered the Watchdog function causing the client device to restart, the Watchdog function will be reverted to the default disabled state. Ensure to re-enable the Watchdog function for the client device.
Clear CMOS	Clears the BIOS setup information through RTL8117 for when the client hangs due to overclocking or other errors.
		Ensure the client device is completely powered off before clearing CMOS. Power the client device on after the clearing the CMOS.
Set Password	Set an RTL8117 encryption password.
		Restart the client device once you have set the new password for the changes to take effect.
Restart Service	Restart service through RTL8117.
KVM	Enable or disable KVM.

* These functions only appear if an agent is already deployed to this device and if you switch from Software Mode to Hardware Mode

Setting the password for RTL8117

You can set an encryption password for RTL8117 using the Set Password function.

Set Password Default Password Password e.g. New password e.g. Confirm Password e.g. Cancel Save

Default Password	Check this item to load a previously set password to the Password field. If no RTL8117 password was previously set, checking Default Password will load the system's default password.
Password	Enter the current password , or you may check Default Password to load a previously set password.
New Password Enter the new password.
Confirm Password	Re-enter the password.

• The password should be a minimum of 8 characters and should only consist of uppercase characters, lowercase characters, and numbers.
• Restart the client device once you have set the new password for the changes to take effect.

5.5.4 Remote Desktop (RTL8117)

The Remote Desktop function provides a flexible interface for out-of-band device management through the desktop accessed in ASUS Control Center Express. This method of remote desktop will allow you to control your client device even if it is not in an OS environment, such as BIOS.

• This remote control method requires the client device to have KVM enabled, and connected using a management LAN port which supports RTL8117 LAN IC.
• The main server will save the current KVM status, if this status has been changed, ensure to reboot the system to ensure the changes are saved.

Setting up KVM before using Remote Desktop

Before using the Out-of-band Management Remote Desktop function, ensure you have enabled KVM, and selected a KVM Display Mode.

1. Select the device you would like to use out-of-band management remote desktop in the main dashboard overview, and click Select function > OOB-Control > KVM > KVM Enable to enable KVM.

If you need to disable the KVM, click Select function > OOB-Control > KVM > KVM Disable, then restart the client device.

1. Next, click Select function > OOB-Control > KVM, and select the KVM Display Mode you would like to use. You may refer to the table below for more information.

Remote Multit-Display	BIOS screen will be mirrored on both server remote desktop and client devices.OS screen will only be displayed on the server remote desktop.
Local Multi-Display	BIOS screen will be mirrored on both server remote desktop and client devices.OS screen will only be displayed on the client device.
Remote Single-Display	BIOS and OS screen will only be displayed on the server remote desktop.
Disable	BIOS and OS screen will only be displayed on the client device.

1. Reboot the client device and enter BIOS setup, then navigate to Advanced > RTL8117 setting and set RTL8117 Manager Controller to [Enabled].

The BIOS settings may differ between client devices. Please refer to your client device's motherboard user manual for more information about navigating the BIOS and BIOS settings.

1. Click on the drop down menu of the KVM Display Mode option, and select the same display mode as the one selected in step 1.

Using the out-of-band management Remote Desktop

On the Management Control Information page of the RTL8117 device, click Remote Desktop, select KVM - 8117 then click on Yes to remotely control your client device even if it is not in an OS environment.

• If you accessed Remote Desktop through a client device's Management Control Information by clicking on Management Control, then clicking on a client device, then Remote Desktop will automatically enter KVM - 8117 mode.
• KVM remote desktop is a hardware mode function. The functions between KVM remote desktop and software mode remote desktop may differ.

Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Selection General KVM - 8117 Yes

Clicking on the Function button offers more options for navigating the remote desktop screen.

Function button ASUS Control Center Express UEPE BIOS UTILITY - E2 Mode 16:26° English A2 Timing (MHz/211) Search (MHz) Information Pro W51378-402 BOS 9x.2007 AMR System 3.0000 in Core Processor Speed: 2000 MIN Memory: B102 MHz/2004 213 MHz CPU Temperature > CPU Core Voltage 1,433 V AC Microband Temperature 34°C E2 System Timing Click directly to choose an display in a new icon designed profile for upgraded system performance on a energy savings. CRAM Start COLD: 0.1 Dimer 4132MS213048.0 COLD: 0.2 SLS COLD: 0.3 SLS COLD: 0.4 SLS Storage Information AFC: SINTEL: 8 INTEL 5000CS/BWLOWS/CTM Normal 2 Switch all D.O.C.P. Enabled Cancelled FAN Profile CPU FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN CPU FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN CPU FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLD FAN COLT Menge(IE) Default(ATS) Save & DoF(FTB) Advanced Mode(FTY)-Search on FAQ

Leave : Return to the previous options

Display remote mouse cursor

: When there is no mouse connected to the client, there may not be a mouse cursor available for the remote screen, click to display a remote mouse cursor on the remote desktop screen.

Leave : Return to the previous options

Switch full screen : Zooms the remote desktop screen to fit within your screen .

Zoom to screen size : Centers the remote desktop screen.

Dynamic zoom size : Zoom in or out by using the horizontal slider.

End the remote control session

5.5.5 USB Redirection (RTL8117)

This item allows your client devices to read USB drives connected to your main server. This is useful for situations where you need to boot up the client device using a USB device, or when you need to access a USB connected to the main server from a remote location.

• This function is only available when the client device is connected using a management LAN port which supports RTL8117 LAN.
• Before using the USB Redirection function, ensure the USB storage device function has been enabled on the client device.
• The USB redirection function for RTL8117 does not support the Share URL function.

USB Redirection IP Address | UUID | PID | Message | Type | Path 192.168.0.17 0073eetc782Itea311ead630vddba230 1544 Ready for communication IMG C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\New Fi Share Image Share Drive Share URL Path C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop\New File\ACCE Demo\ISO\Win10 Setup.iso

USB and device information	The USB Redirection list displays the IP address and other information about the device the USB is connected to.
Share Image	Select an image file you wish to mount onto the client device.
Share Drive	Allow the client device access to a selected USB storage device connected to the main server device.
Share URL	Copy the path or link to an image file you wish to mount onto the client device.
Image Path	The path of your redirected USB device or image file

Share Image

Allows you to share an Image file.

1. Check Share Image.
2. Select the image file you wish to mount, then click Mount in the File Picker window.
3. If the image file is successfully mounted, Ready for communication will be displayed in the Message column.

Share Drive

Allows you to share a USB storage device.

1. Check Share Drive, and ensure the remote device's USB function is enabled.
2. Select the USB storage device you wish to mount.
3. If the USB storage device is successfully mounted, Ready for communication will be displayed in the Message column.

5.5.6 Smart BIOS (RTL8117)

This item allows you to update the BIOS of a device by uploading a BIOS file manually or from the BIOS Cache if the device cannot be powered on to perform a BIOS update or repair.

The client device will begin updating the BIOS after shutting down. The update process may take a while, please wait for the update to be finished. Once the BIOS flash is finished the client device will restart.

DO NOT disconnect the power supply during the BIOS flash.

Flashing BIOS by manually uploading a BIOS file

Manually upload a BIOS file to flash the BIOS of the client device. The BIOS file uploaded and flashed with will be added to the BIOS Cache.

1. Select Manually Upload BIOS File in the BIOS Flash Type field.
2. Click on Browse to select a BIOS file, then click OK to confirm the BIOS file was uploaded successfully. The uploaded BIOS file will also be added to the BIOS Cache
3. Click on Flash BIOS.

Flash Mode will default to Hardware Mode.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management Host Name | IP Address | Model Name | BIOS Version | BIOS Release Date DESPOR VEGEMS | TEL MELU 10 | Pre WIS 6770-ACE | BIOS | 08/01/2019 Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Manually Upload BIOS File Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS BIOS Cache

1. Select if you wish to perform a Normal Mode BIOS flash or if you wish to do a Recovery Mode BIOS flash, then click OK.

Performing a Recovery Mode BIOS Flash will reset all BIOS configurations, and remove all previous configurations.

Do you really want to update your BIOS? Normal Mode Recovery Mode (The data will not be saved) OK Cancel

Flashing BIOS from the BIOS cache

You can select a BIOS file from the BIOS cache.

1. Select Flash from BIOS Cache in the BIOS Flash Type field.
2. Select a BIOS file from the BIOS Cache List drop down menu.
3. Click on Flash BIOS.

Flash Mode will default to Hardware Mode.

BIOS Flash Management Host Name | IP Address | Model Name | BIOS Version | BIOS Release Date | DESIGN VISIONR 192 MB/30 Pre-WC/XTU-ACE 0801 0801/2010 Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Flash From BIOS Cache BIOS Cache List 0803 Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS BIOS Cache

1. Select if you wish to perform a Normal Mode BIOS flash or if you wish to do a Recovery Mode BIOS flash, then click OK.

Performing a Recovery Mode BIOS Flash will reset all BIOS configurations, and remove all previous configurations.

Do you really want to update your BIOS? Normal Mode Recovery Mode (The data will not be saved) OK Cancel

1. (Optional) If you selected Recovery Mode, you will be prompted with a warning message, as Recovery Mode will remove all previous BIOS data and configurations. Click Flash to continue with using Recovery Mode.

Removing a BIOS file from the BIOS cache

You can view the BIOS files available for the client device in the BIOS Cache block. To remove a BIOS file from the BIOS Cache, check the BIOS file you wish to remove, then click on Remove.

Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Manually Upload BIOS File Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Version Build Date File Size Pin 013.572-462 0803 (MOS/0274) 32 MB Remove

5.5.7 Firmware Update (RTL8117)

This item allows you to update the firmware of the RTL8117 LAN IC, and also displays the results of the firmware update.

Firmware Update will be disabled when KVM is set to enabled. To update firmware please set KVM to disabled.

Uploading and updating firmware

1. Click on Import File, then select you firmware file (.img) and click Open.

Firmware Update Firmware Information Firmware Version Firmware Build Date Import File Firmware Update Firmware Update Result IP Address | UUID Current Version | Status | 192.168.0.13 0589112Bx7c49a1a1bae39435a26128 0111_20200318

1. Click on Firmware Update, then wait for the update to be completed.

Firmware Update Firmware Information Firmware Version 0111_20200318 Firmware Build Date 2020/03/10 16:34:01 Import File Firmware Update Firmware Update Result IP Address | UUID | Current Version | Status | 192.168.0.13 0589112Be7c49a1ef1bae3943Sa26128 0111_20200318

1. You can check the results of the firmware update in the Firmware Update Result block.
2. (optional) If the client device's firmware was updated while it was powered on, please reboot the client device after the firmware has been successfully updated.

5.5.8 Trust Zone (RTL8117)

This item will not be available if your device is not logged into an OS environment, or is not connected using a management LAN port which supports RTL 8117 LAN IC.

The Trust Zone function provides a method of protecting your client devices from being accessed by unauthorized or non-trusted connections. This item will allow you to set main server IP addresses to a client device's trust zone, and only main server IP addresses added to the Trust Zone are allowed to perform remote management control functions on the client device.

If you access the Trust Zone page using the following methods:

• Clicking on in M.C column of the Devices List.
• Scanning, then selecting a device from the Management Controller page.
  You will only be able to set the Trust Zone of the selected device. To view the Trust Zone of multiple devices, please navigate back to the main menu page, then select multiple devices and select OOB-Control > Trust Zone from the Select Function drop down menu.

Adding a trust zone

Up to 8 sets of main server IP address ranges may be added to a client device, if you already have 8 sets and wish to add more, please remove an existing set of IP address range from the trust list before adding the new IP address range.

1. Click on Add.

Trust Zone Clients 102.168.0.13 Trust Zone Mode By List List of Zone Add Remove Index Ip From Ip to 1 192.168.0.8 192.168.0.10 2 192.168.0.50 192.168.0.51 3 192.168.0.90 192.168.0.101

2. Enter the IP address range of a main server you wish to add to the client device's trust zone, then click Save.

Trust Zone Clients 192.168.0.13 Trust Zone Trust Zone Setting Sections 4 Start Address 192.168.0.151 End Address IP Address Save Cancel

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more IP address ranges to the trust zone.
2. Select By List in the Trust Zone Mode field drop down menu to activate the IP addresses added to the trust zone list.

Trust Zone Clients 102.168.0.13 Trust Zone Mode By List List of Zone Add Remove index ip from lp to 1 192.168.0.8 192.168.0.10 2 192.168.0.50 192.168.0.55 3 192.168.0.99 192.168.0.101

1. (optional) Select another device from the trust zone for the selected device. Clients drop down list to set the

Only follow this step if you selected multiple devices to set the trust zone.

Trust Zone Clients Trust Zone Mode List of Zone index | ip from | ip to 1 192.168.0.6 192.5 2 192.168.0.50 192.5 3 192.168.0.94 192.5 192.168.0.13 192.168.0.207 192.168.0.110 192.168.0.170 192.168.0.132 192.168.0.156 192.168.0.139 192.168.0.150 192.168.0.114 192.168.0.81 192.168.0.91 192.168.0.94 192.168.0.183 192.168.0.60 192.168.0.224 192.168.0.142 192.168.0.137 192.168.0.190 192.168.0.55 192.168.0.75 192.168.0.13 By List Add Remove

1. (optional) Repeat steps 1 to 4 to add main server IP address ranges to the trust zone of the newly selected device.

Only follow this step if you selected multiple devices to set the trust zone.

Ensure that the trust zone list contains a main server IP address, if the trust zone list does not contain a main server IP address, the trust zone cannot be activated.

Trust Zone Clients 192.198.0.13 Trust Zone Warning Invalid zone-list, the server IP is not belong to selected IP section(s). List at: OK Index Up From 782.198.0.50 782.198.0.55 782.198.0.191

Deleting a trust zone

Check the IP addresses you would like to delete from the trust zone list, then click on Remove.

Trust Zone Clients 102.168.0.13 Trust Zone Mode By List List of Zone Add Remove index up from Up to 1 192.168.0.8 192.168.0.90 2 192.168.0.50 192.168.0.51 3 192.168.0.99 192.168.0.901

If you wish to disable an activated trust zone list, select Disable from the Trust Zone Mode field drop down menu.

- The main server IP address cannot be removed from an activated trust zone list, ensure that the main server IP address is not included in the IP sections you would like to remove.

Trust Zone Clients 192.168.0.13 Trust Zone Mode Waiting By List Unable to remove, the server IP is belong to this section. List of Zone OK Add Remove Index Up from 1 192.168.0.8 192.168.0.95 2 192.168.0.50 192.168.0.55 3 192.168.0.99 192.168.0.931

- If a main server's IP address was changed due to other reasons, and is already included in an activated trust zone of a client device, you will not be able to perform remote management control functions on the client device through the main server with the new IP address as it is not included in the client device's trust zone. You can set the new main server IP address on the client device through BIOS > Advanced > RTL8117 Settings.

5.5.9 Event Log (RTL8117)

This item allows you to view the event log of the last time the client device was powered on, giving you more information to analyze the reason for the problem or issue.

Event Log Event Log Date | Time | Message | 2021.05.12 14:48:00 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:48:00 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:48:00 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:59 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:58 | Load VGA BIOS | 2021.05.12 14:47:58 | Boot Successfully | 2021.05.12 14:47:57 | Check CPU | 2021.05.12 14:47:46 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:46 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:46 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:46 | Detect HDD | 2021.05.12 14:47:44 | Load VGA BIOS | 2021.05.12 14:47:44 | Boot Successfully | 2021.05.12 14:47:42 | Check CPU | 2021.05.11 17:09:57 | Detect HDD |

5.6 Management Control Information (vPro)

The vPro Management Control Information allows you to remotely perform repairs when an error occurs on the client OS, check the hardware assets when the device powered off, pin point system errors using the event log and trap alert system, and provide network management and network protection for client devices.

The functions in this section are hardware controlled and values may differ with the software version. Please refer to the Device Information chapter for more information on Software mode.

• The client device needs to support Intel vPro remote management controller.
• Availability of certain functions may vary depending on whether the client device supports Intel Standard Manageability (ISM), Active Management Technology (AMT), or Small Business Technology (SBT). Use Intel MEBx to check which functions are supported on the client device.
• Ensure that the client device's BIOS AMT and Intel MEBx settings are set to enable the client device's vPro functions before using these functions through the management controller.
• Any mention of the trademark Intel or Intel vPro, are trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries.

Device icon Client device details Toggle between Software and Hardware Mode* Management Control Information 7d996d269204cdabfe43e11029a4c288 Login User admin Login Status Login successful OS Information Windows Management Controller Intel® vPro™ Model Name PB60S IP Address 192.168.0.15 Firmware Version 12.0.30 Mode Hardware Inventory Control Remote Desktop USB Redirection Power Network Wake-up Alarm System Record Certificate

* This item will not be available if you accessed the Management Control Information page through Management Control.

Device Icon	Displays the connection status of the client device's vPro remote management controller.
Login user	Displays the user account currently logged into the client device's vPro remote management controller.
Login Status	Displays the current login status to the client device's vPro remote management controller.
Management Controller	Displays the remote management controller of the client device.
Model Name	Displays the model name of the client device.
IP Address	Displays the IP address of client device.
Firmware Version	Displays the firmware version of client device's vPro remote management controller.

5.6.1 Inventory (vPro)

This item displays the client device's disk, hardware asset, and memory information.

Disk Information

Disk Information Asset Information Memory HFS256G39TND-N210A Media Type Fixed hard disk media Status OK Serial Number EJ89ND41111209K05 DeviceID MEDIA DEV 0 Size 256060514 MB S.M.A.R.T true

Device Name	Displays the name of the disk device.
Media Type	Displays media type of the disk device.
Status	Displays the current status of the disk device.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the disk device.
DeviceID	Displays the ID of the disk device.
Size	Displays the capacity size of the disk device.
S.M.A.R.T	Displays the S.M.A.R.T attribute status.

Asset Information

Disk Information Asset Information Memory Base board Model Name PB605 Serial Number SERIAL-1234567890 Asset Tag Default string Manufacturer ASUSTeK COMPUTER INC. Software version Rev 1.xx Replaceable? YES

Base board	Displays the model name, serial number, asset tag, manufacturer and other information of the base board.
Platform	Displays the product name, serial number, manufacturer and other information.
BIOS	Displays the release date, version, manufacturer, and other information of the BIOS.
Processor	Displays the manufacturer, family, model, clock speed, and other information of the processor.

Memory

Disk Information Asset Information Memory Memory Module 1 Bank Label BANK 0 Serial Number 80A90790 Manufacturer SK Hynix Form Factor SODIMM Size 8132 MB Type DO84 Asset Tag 9676543210 Part Number HMA81GS6AFRIN-UN

Bank Label	Displays the bank label of the memory module.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the memory module.
Manufacturer	Displays the manufacturer of the memory module.
Form Factor	Displays the form factor of the memory module.
Size	Displays the capacity of the memory module.
Type	Displays the type of the memory module.
Asset Tag	Displays the asset tag of the memory module.
Part Number	Displays the part number of the memory module.

5.6.2 Control (vPro)

This item allows you to set the account and password, KVM, USB redirection, system trap alert, and system trap log level functions of the vPro device.

You can add or edit remote management controller notifications in Notification Rule. The Event Log on the dashboard will display the system Trap Alert notifications you have set.

• The password for vPro Account must be at least 8 characters long, and must contain one uppercase character (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and one special character.
• The KVM password must contain 8 characters, and must contain uppercase characters (A-Z), lowercase characters, numbers (0-9), and special characters.
• Ensure that port 162 is opened before enabling system trap alerts.

Control Login User vPro Account/Password KVM Password Hardware Asset Info Enable/Disable KVM Enable/Disable USB Redirection System Trap Alert System Trap Log Level Login Set Password Set Password Update Disable Enable Set Level Mode Hardware

vPro Account/Password	Set the account and password of the vPro device.
Hardware Asset Information	Update the hardware asset information of the client device.
KVM Password	Update and set the vPro device's KVM password.
Enable/Disable KVM	Enable or disable the KVM of the device.
Enable/Disable USB Redirection	Enable or disable the USB redirection function.
System Trap Alert	Enable or disable the system trap alert.
System Trap Log Level	Set the log level of system trap (Information, Warning, Error)

5.6.3 Remote Desktop (vPro)

The Remote Desktop function allows you to control a vPro client device through KVM. This is useful for remotely monitoring and repairing the client device, should the client device's OS encounter an error.

• Availability of certain functions may vary depending on vPro support and ME version. Remote desktop is not supported by Intel Standard Manageability (ISM).
• If the client device is operating from the Intel MEBx, you will not be able to connect using KVM.
• The device will not be able to enter the Intel MEBx settings page if the client device was restarted whilst using KVM.
• When using the KVM remote desktop function of a vPro device, the border of the client device screen will flash red and yellow to indicate that the client device is currently running the KVM remote desktop function.

Setting up KVM before using Remote Desktop

Before using the Out-of-band Management Remote Desktop function for the first time, ensure that KVM is enabled. On the Management Control Information page of the vPro device, click Control, then click the drop down menu of the Enable/Disable KVM field and select Enable.

To disable KVM, select the Disable option and restart the client device.

Control Login User vPro Account/Password KVM Password Hardware Asset Info Enable/Disable KVM Enable/Disable USB Redirection System Trap Alert System Trap Log Level Enable Disable Update Enable/Disable USB Redirection Enable Set Level Mode Hardware

Using the out-of-band management Remote Desktop

On the Management Control Information page of the vPro device, click Remote Desktop, then select the desired connection method

Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Selection vPro KVM (Traditional Vnc Protocol Connection) vPro KVM ( Hardware UnEncrypted Connection ) vPro KVM ( Hardware Encrypted Connection ) Yes

Traditional VNC protocol connection	Establish an encrypted connection using the VNC protocol.
Hardware unencrypted connection	Establish an unencrypted connection.
Hardware encrypted connection	Establish an encrypted connection using the TLS protocol.

• The default quality for hardware encrypted connections is set to Low. Use the Function button after establishing a connection to adjust the quality. Quality options may vary depending on vPro and ME support.
• Ensure that a KVM password is set before attempting to establish a traditional VNC protocol connection. To set the KVM password, open the Control page, then click KVM Password. The KVM password must be at least eight characters and must include at least one upper case, one lower case, and one special character.

Once a connection is established, clicking the Function button offers more options for navigating the remote desktop screen. Refer to 4.9 Remote Desktop (General) for more information on the Function button.

5.6.4 Storage Redirection (vPro)

This item allows your vPro device to redirect USB-R/IDE-R storage.

• The USB redirection function for vPro does not support NTFS format USB devices.
• When using the USB redirection function for vPro, the client device will be displayed as Floppy Disk A, CD Drive (drive code) when successfully mounted.

Storage Redirection Image Mount IP Address 192.168.50.130 IMG Select IMG Map Removable Device / CDROM Select drive (Removable Device) Select ISO Map Mount Status Transfer Information Volume 0 Speed (Mbps) 0

IP Address	Displays the IP address of the client device.
IMG	Select the image file (.img) to transfer.
Removable Device / CDROM	Select the removable storage device or ISO file (.iso) to transfer.
Mount Status	Displays the mount status of the device and files.
Volume	Displays the amount of data transferred.
Speed(Mbps)	Displays the transfer speed of the data.

Mounting an image file

After enabling USB Redirection on the Control page, please follow the steps below to mount an image file.

1. Click Select IMG file, then select the image file you wish to mount in the File picker and click OK.
2. Click Mount.

Storage Redirection Image Mount IP Address 192.168.50.130 NO Select NO No Removable Device / COROM Select Drive (Removable Device) Select ISO The Mount Status OK

Mounting a removable device or CDROM (ISO file)

Follow the steps below to mount a removable device or ISO file.

1. Click Select drive (Removable device), or Select ISO file, then select the device or ISO file you wish to mount in the File picker and click OK.
2. Click Mount.

Storage Redirection Image Mount IP Address 182.168.50.130 IMG SELECT IMG TIG Removable Device / CDROM Select drive (Removable Device) Select ISO file Mount Status

Ending storage redirection

Click Stop to end storage redirection.

Storage Redirection Image Mount IP Address 192.168.0.15 Removable Device Dot Select drive (Removable Device) Select IMO file CDROM Select drive (CD-ROM) Select ISO file Mount Status Stop

5.6.5 Power (vPro)

This item allows you to view the client vPro device's power status, and also allows you to execute power control functions.

Power Control Power Status Power Up Refresh Power Action Power Up Sleep Power Cycle Hibernate Power Down Reset Soft-off Soft-reset Power up to BIOS Update Power Policy Allow AMT to connect after power Off Do not allow AMT to connect after power Off Update

Power Status

This item allows you to view the client device's current power status.

Clicking on Refresh will update the information shown on the Power Status page to the latest information.

Power Status Power Up Refresh

Power Action

This item allows you to select the power action the client device should execute.

The power actions available may differ depending on the client device's power and operating system status. Please refer to the actual options available on your screen.

1. Select a power action from the Power Action list.
2. Click on Update.

Power Action Power Up Sleep Power Cycle Hibemate Power Down Reset Soft-off Soft reset Power up to BIOS Update

1. Check if the power action is correct in the confirmation window, then click OK.
2. You can check if the power action has been executed by checking if the Power Status has been updated to the power action you selected.

Power Policy

This item allows you to select whether to allow AMT to connect after powering off.

Power Policy Allow AMT to connect after power Off Do not allow AMT to connect after power Off Update

If you selected Do not allow AMT to connect after power Off, you will not be able to execute power control functions, refresh the power status, or change power policy while the client device is powered off. If you wish to execute power control functions, please set the power policy to Allow AMT to connect after power Off once the client device has been woken up or powered on.

Power Action • Reset • Soft off • Soft reset • Reset up to BIOS • Reset to BIOS • Reset to IDE-8 Happy • Reset on to IDE-8 Happy • Reset to IDE-8 CUROM • Reset on to IDE-8 CUROM Power Action result Can't come to remote And save. Power Policy • Allow AMET to connect after power Off • Do not allow AMET to connect after power Off

5.6.6 Network (vPro)

This item allows you to set the wired and wireless network settings of the client vPro device, and also allows you to use the System Defense function to implement Internet safety precautions.

Wireless interface settings may be unavailable on vPro client devices with Intel Standard Manageability (ISM).

Network Network Connectivity System Defense Wired Interface Link State Link is up Link Policy S0/AC , Sx/AC MAC Address 04-92-26-6d-99-7d Respond to ping ICMP · RMCP IP State Static IP address

Network Connectivity

This item allows you view and manage the wired/wireless network status and settings.

Network Network Connectivity System Defense Wired Interface Link State Link is up Link Policy 50iAC, Sx/AC MAC Address 64-82-26-6d-99-7d Respond to ping ICMP · RMCP IP State Static IP address

• Wired Interface Settings

Displays and allows you to configure wired network settings of the client device.

Link State	Displays the wired network link state.
Link Policy	Displays the wired network link policy.
MAC Address	Displays the wired network MAC address.
Respond to ping	Displays the wired network ping response protocol.
IP State	Displays the wired network IP state.
IP Address	Displays the wired network IP address.
IP Default Gateway	Displays the wired network IP default gateway.
IP Subnet Mask	Displays the wired network IP subnet mask.
IP Domain Name Server	Displays the wired network IP Domain Name Server.

Editing wired interface IP

Click on Edit in the Wired Interface Settings block to set the client device's IP from either IP synchronizes with the operating system, Automatically use DHCP server, or Static IP address.

Wired Interface IP synchronizes with the operating system Automatically use DHCP server Static IP address OK Cancel

Setting ping packet response

Click on Set ping packet response in the Wired Interface block to set the client device's wired network pin packet response from either Disable, ICMP, RMCP, or ICMP & RMCP.

Ping Response Disable ICMP RMCP ICMP & RMCP OK Cancel

Searching for device

Click on Search for device in the Wired Interface block to search for a device within a given IP range. For more information on scanning an IP range, please refer to 3.2.2 Scanning an IP range.

Scan IP range Local IP Address IP Source 192.168.0.9 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0/24 Manual IP Address Range Mask Boundary IP Source Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0/24 OK Cancel

• Wireless Interface Settings

Displays and allows you to configure wireless network settings of the client device.

Link State	Displays the wireless network link state.
Link Policy	Displays the wireless network link policy.
MAC Address	Displays the wireless network MAC address.
State	Displays the wireless network settings state.
Radio State	Displays the wireless network radio state.
IP Address	Displays the wireless network IP address.
IP Default Gateway	Displays the wireless network IP default gateway.
IP Subnet Mask	Displays the wireless network IP subnet mask.
IP Domain Name Server	Displays the wireless network IP Domain Name Server.

Setting wireless state:

Click on Edit in the Wireless Interface Settings block to set the client device's wireless state from either Disable, Enabled in S0, or Enabled in S0, sX/AC. The wireless network's connection will proceed according to the wireless state selected.

Wireless State Disable Enabled in S0 Enabled in S0, Sx/AC OK Cancel

• Wi-Fi Profile

This item allows you to add or edit the Wi-Fi profile(s) of the client device. The client device will connect/disconnect according to the Wi-Fi profile and wireless state selected.

Adding a new Wi-Fi profile

1. Click on Add.

Wifi Profile MyASUS MyASUS Add

1. Enter the information for the Wi-Fi profile.
2. Click on OK once you are finished. The newly added Wi-Fi profile should appear in the profile list.

Add Wifi Profile Profile Name My ASUS SSID My ASUS Priority 1 Authorization WPA2 PSK Encryption TKIP-RC4 Password: .......... Confirm Password .......... OK Cancel

Editing a Wi-Fi profile

To edit an existing Wi-Fi profile click on the edit icon (☐) next to the profile name.

Deleting a Wi-Fi profile

To delete an existing Wi-Fi profile click on the delete icon (图标) next to the profile name.

System Defense

This item allows you to define and execute Internet safety measures on the client device, allowing you to isolate the network and also providing you with an intrusion test function.

Network Network Connectivity System Defense Packet Statistics Active Policy test Wired Test 0 packets Wired TX Else Filter 117 packets Wired RX Else Filter 48 packets Deactivate Policy System Defense Filters Software name | 1 | Action | Proto... | Direc... | IP Address | Port Range | Event Test 3 L.. Allow,Count TCP Inbound of 192,168,020 of 8080-8089 Off

• System Defense Filters

This item allows you set the outgoing and incoming packets for the isolated network, allow or ban specific IP addresses, and set network traffic filters to calculate and record data transfer.

Click on Refresh to refresh the System Defense Filters list to the latest updated state.

System Defense Filters □ Software name | Type | Action | Protocol | Direct... | IP Address | Port Range | Event □ Test 7 ipvl AllowCount TCP Inbound ≤ 192.1680.20 ≤ 8000-8089 On □ Test 8 ipvl AllowCount TCP Outbound ≤ 192.1680.20 ≤ 8000-8089 On Add Filter Add Policy Remove Filter Refresh

Adding a system defense filter

1. Click on Add Filter.

System Defense Filters Software name | Type | Action | Protocol | Direct... | IP Address | Port Range | Event Test 7 ipvt AllowCount TCP Inbound ≤ 192.168.0.20 ≤ 8080-8089 On Test 8 ipvt AllowCount TCP Outbound ≤ 192.168.0.20 ≤ 8080-8089 On Add Filter Add Policy Remove Filter Refresh

2. Select and enter the settings for the new system defense filter, then click OK.

Add System Defense Filter Software name Test Type TCP Packet filter Direction Inbound Action Allow , Packet Traffic Statistics Event Do Nothing IP Address Filter IP Direction Source IP Address 192.168.20 Subnet Mask Request Port Filter Port Direction Source Port Range 8080 - 8089 OK Cancel

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more system defense filters.
2. The newly added system defense filter(s) will be displayed in the System Defense Filters list.

Removing a system defense filter

To remove a system defense filter(s), select the system defense filter(s) you would like to remove, then click Remove Filter.

System Defense Filters Software name | Type | Action | Protocol | Direct... | IP Address | Port Range | Event Test 7 lpr4 Allwe.Count TCP Inbound 192.168.0.20 8080-8089 On Test 8 lpr4 Allwe.Count TCP Outbound 192.168.0.20 8080-8089 On Add Filter Add Policy Remove Filter Refresh

• System Defense Policy

This item will check incoming and outgoing packets to see if they match or do not match the conditions set in the filter, then act according to the settings of the policy.

Click on Refresh to refresh the System Defense Policy list to the latest updated state.

System Defense Policies Software name id Filter ID Tx Action Tx Packet Tx Event Rx Action Rx Packet Rx Event Test 7 7.8 Allow Display OFF Allow Display Off Activate Policy Remove Policy Refresh

Adding a system defense policy

1. Select the system defense filters you would like to add a policy to in the System Defense Filters list, then click Add Policy.

System Defense Filters ✓ Software name Id Type Action Protocol Direction IP Address Port Range ✓ Test 7 Ipx4 AllowCount TCP Inbound 192.168.0.20 8080-8089 ✓ Test 8 Ipx4 AllowCount TCP Outbound 192.168.0.20 8080-8089 Add Filter Add Policy Remove Filter Refresh

1. Select and enter the settings for the system defense policy, then click OK.

Add System Defense Policy Software name Test Default Tx Action Allow, Packet Traffic Statistics Tx Event Event On Match Default Rx Action Allow, Packet Traffic Statistics Rx Event Event On Match OK Cancel

1. The newly added system defense policy will be displayed in the System Defense Policies list.

Removing a system defense policy

Select the system defense policy you would like to remove in the System Defense Policy list, then click Remove Policy.

System Defense Policies Software name Id Filter ID Tx Action Tx Packet Tx Event Rx Action Rx Packet Rx Event Test 7 7.8 Allow Display Off Allow Display Off Activate Policy Remove Policy Refresh

Activating a system defense policy

Select the system defense policy you would like to activate in the System Defense Policy list, then click Activate Policy.

System Defense Policies Software name id Filter ID Tx Action Tx Packet Tx Event Rx Action Rx Packet Rx Event Test 7 7.8 Allow Display Off Allow Display Off Activate Policy Remove Policy Refresh

You can view packets statistics if you scroll to the top of the System Defense page, under the Packet Statistics block.

Network Network Connectivity System Defense Packet Statistics Active Policy Test Wired Test 0 packets Wired Test 0 packets Wired TX Else Filter 303 packets Wired RX Else Filter 145 packets Deactivate Policy

Only one System Defense Policy may be active at a time, if you wish to use a different System Defense Policy, click on Deactivate Policy in the Packet Statistics block to deactivate the currently active policy, then activate the new policy.

5.6.7 Wake-up Alarm (vPro)

This item allows you to set an alarm to wake up the client vPro device when the client device is in sleep mode or powered down.

Wake Alarms Date & Time Date 2020/10/16 Time 15:42:58 Sync Local Time Refresh Time Wake Alarms Software name Data Time Interval Alarm test 2020/10/17 9:0 Alarm test2 2020/10/20 8:30 9 hours Refresh Delete Add

Date	Date on the client vPro device.
Time	Time on the client vPro device.
Sync Local Time	Synchronizes the client vPro device's time to match the main server's.
Refresh Time	Updates the client vPro device's time to the latest updated state.

Adding a new wake alarm

• Up to five (5) wake alarms can be added to a single client vPro device, if you have reached the maximum limit of wake alarms allowed on a device, please delete an unused wake alarm first.
• Click on Refresh to refresh the Wake Alarms list to the latest updated state.

1. Click on Add.

Wake Alarms Date & Time Date 2020/10/16 Time 15:42:58 Sync Local Time Refresh Time Wake Alarms Software name Data Time Interval Alarm test 2020/10/17 9:00 Alarm test2 2020/10/20 8:30 9 hours Refresh Delete Add

2. Enter the settings for your new wake alarm, then click OK.

Add a new wake-up alarm Name AlarmTest Date 2021-07-20 Time 15 : 17 Interval OK

1. The newly added wake alarm will be displayed in the Wake Alarms list.

Wake Alarms Software name Date Time Interval Alarm test 2020/10/17 9:0 Alarm test2 2020/10/20 8:30 9 hours Refresh Delete Add

Removing a wake alarm

Select the wake alarm you would like to remove in the Wake Alarms list, then click Delete.

Wake Alarms Software native Date Time Interval Alarm test 2020/10/17 9:0 Alarm test2 2020/10/20 8:30 9 hours Refresh Delete Add

5.6.8 System Record (vPro)

This item allows you to quickly detect the problems or issues on a client vPro device through the event log and alert records.

System Record Event Log Level Type | Date & Time | Source | Message 2020-10-14 15:08:51 Intel® ME Embedded controller/management controller initialization 2020-10-14 15:07:07 BIOS Starting operating system boot process 2020-10-14 15:07:04 BIOS USB resource configuration 2020-10-14 15:07:04 System board Keyboard test 2020-10-14 15:07:03 BIOS PCI resource configuration 2020-10-14 11:53:01 Intel® ME Embedded controller/management controller initialization Stop Refresh Clear Export Audit Log Initiator | Date & Time | Type | Message | Additional message Local | 2019-09-21 01:15:47 Security Admin Provisioning Started Local | 2019-09-21 01:15:47 Security Admin Provisioning Completed admin,192.168.1.69 | 2019-09-21 01:53:17 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened admin,192.168.1.69 | 2019-09-21 01:54:47 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened admin,192.168.1.69 | 2019-09-21 01:55:28 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened

Event Log

View the client vPro device's event log records and analyze and detect device issues or problems.

Event Log Level Type Date & Time | Source | Message | ▲ 2020-10-15 17:29:38 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process | ▲ 2020-10-15 17:27:08 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process | ▲ 2020-10-15 16:33:35 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process | ▲ 2020-10-15 15:68:41 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process | ▲ 2020-10-15 15:33:50 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process | ▲ 2020-10-15 15:23:41 | BIOS | Starting operating system boot process ▶ Start Refresh Clear Export

Start / Stop	Start or stop recording the event log.
Refresh	Refresh the event log to the latest updated state.
Clear	Clear the event log records.
Export	Export the event log records.

Audit Log

Records specified device system operations and unauthorized visits into the Audit Log. Through tracking the audit log, you can detect various sources of problems, security breaches, or illegal usage.

• Ensure to periodically export and clear the client vPro device's audit log.
• When you receive an alert about the storage space for the audit log, please export then clear the audit log. Once the audit log's storage space is full, you will not be able to execute any important or events defined as severe issues on the client device.

Audit Log Initiator Date & Time Type Message Additional message Local 2019-09-21 01:15:47 Security Admin Provisioning Started Local 2019-09-21 01:15:47 Security Admin Provisioning Completed admin.192.168.1.69 2019-09-21 01:53:17 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened admin.192.168.1.69 2019-09-21 01:54:47 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened admin.192.168.1.69 2019-09-21 01:56:28 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened admin.192.168.1.69 2019-09-21 01:57:43 Redirection Manager IDER Session Opened Stop Refresh Clear Export

Start / Stop	Start or stop recording the audit log.
Refresh	Refresh the audit log to the latest updated state.
Clear	Clear the audit log records.
Export	Export the audit log records.

5.6.9 Certificate (vPro)

This item allows you to import certificates for encryption and identification. This will ensure the connection between main server and client vPro device is safe and secure.

Please refer to the Certificate supplier information on the Intel website for details on obtaining certificates. Ensure to check the types supported by the certificate.

Certificate management Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add List of Certificate ID Active Issued to Issued ... Coun... State/Provi... Local... Organizational... Intel® AMT Certificate: Handle: 1 ASUS Inc. ASUS Inc. EN California Los Ang... ASUS Group Remove Activate Certificate

Import File	Import a certificate file.
Add	Add the imported certificate to the Certificates list.
Country	Import the certificate's country code.
State/Province	Import the certificate's state/province.
Locality	Import the certificate's locality.
Organization Unit	Import the certificate's organization unit.
Common Name	Import the certificate's common name.
Active	1 represents the certificate is active, and 0 represents the certificate is inactive in the Active column.
Remove	Removes selected certificate(s).
Activate Certificate	Activates selected certificate(s).

Adding and activating a certificate on single device

1. Click Certificate on the Management Control Information page of a device to add and activate a certificate on a single device.

• Each client vPro device can only have 1 certificate active at a time, ensure to activate the certificate after importing the certificate.

- The Remove and Activate Certificate functions are only supported if you accessed the Certificate function through the Management Control Information page of a single device.

1. Click on Import File and select the certificate to import.

Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add

1. Check if the imported certificate information is correct in the Certificate Information block, then click Add.

Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add

1. The newly added certificate will show up in the List of Certificate. Select the certificate you wish to activate from the List of Certificate block, then click Activate Certificate.

Certificate management Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add List of Certificate ID Active Issued to Issued ... Coun... State/Provi... Local... Organizational... Intel® AMT Certificate: Handle: 1 ASUS Inc. ASUS Inc. EN California Los Ang... ASUS Group Remove Activate Certificate

Removing a certificate on a single device

1. Click Certificate on the Management Control Information page of a device to add and activate a certificate on a single device.

The Remove and Activate Certificate functions are only supported if you accessed the Certificate function through the Management Control Information page of a single device.

1. Select the certificate(s) you wish to remove from the List of Certificate and click Remove.

You cannot delete an active certificate. Please select and activate a different inactive certificate first if you wish to delete a currently active certificate.

List of Certificate ID Active Issued to Issued ... Coun... State/Provi... Local... Organizational... Intel® AMT Certificate Handle 1 1 ASUS Inc. ASUS Inc. EN California Los Ang.. ASUS Group Remove Activate Certificate

Adding and activating a certificate on multiple device

1. Select multiple devices on the main menu page, then select OOB-Control> Certificate Management from the Select Function drop down menu.

• Each client vPro device can only have 1 certificate active at a time, ensure to activate the certificate after importing the certificate.
- The Remove and Activate Certificate functions are only supported if you accessed the Certificate function through the Management Control Information page of a single device.

1. Click on Import File and select the certificate to import.

Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add

1. Check if the imported certificate information is correct in the Certificate Information block. Import

2. If required, check the Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate? option.

The Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate? option is only available if you accessed the Certificate function through the OOB-Control > Certificate Management.

Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add List of Active Certificate IP ID Issued to Issued by Country State/Province Locality On 192.168.0.15 Inlet® AMT Certificate: Handle: 0 server vpro Vpro CA Certificate am Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate?

5. Click on Add the newly added certificate will be displayed in the List of Active Certificate block.

- If you checked the Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate? option in step 4, the newly added certificate will replace the older version of the certificate.

- If you did not check the Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate? option, the previously active older version of the certificate will become inactive and not be displayed in the List of Active Certificate block. To delete the older inactive certificate, you will need to access the Certificate page by clicking Certificate on the Management Control Information page of a single device.

Import Certificate Information Country State/Province Locality Organizational Unit Common Name Import File Add List of Active Certificate IP ID Issued to Issued by Country State/Province Locality On 192.168.0.13 Intel® AMT Certificate: Handle: 0 server vpro Vpro CA Certificate Do you want to delete the older version of the certificate when adding a new certificate?

5.7 Management Control Information (BMC)

The BMC Management Control Information allows you to monitor hardware and asset information or manage functions such as KVM remote control, remote power control, Serial-over-LAN (SOL), media redirection, or IPMITool commands.

- The functions in this section are hardware controlled and values may differ with the software version. Please refer to Chapter 4 for more information on Software mode.

- Click the id to expand or hide additional information.

- Before using BMC management control, please enable BMC functions in the BIOS of the client device, set the BMC username and password on the client device, and ensure that the connection to the BMC device and web console is stable.

- Certain functions such as hardware and asset information are available even when the client device is offline. For other functions, please wait for ASUS Control Center Express to finish connecting to the BMC remote management controller before selecting any functions to avoid unexpected behavior.

- Please ensure that the client device supports the BMC remote management controller and that all sensors are connected and working properly.

Client device detailsDevice icon Toggle between Software and Hardware Mode* Management Control Information 09000800070006000500040003000200 Mode Hardware Login User admin Login Status Login successful Management Controller BMC IP Address 192.158.0.101 Management OEM Status Support Model Name RDG STRIK Z690-F GAMING WIFI BIOS Version 9808 BIOS Build Date 03/10/2022 Firmware Model KOMMANDO Firmware Version 1.1.9 Firmware Build Date Mar 4 2022 Power Status On LED Status Off Up Time 2d 17h Timezone GMT-05 Hardware Sensor Inventory Control Remote Desktop Smart BIOS Firmware Update Event Log IPMI IPMI SOL

* This item will not be available if you accessed the Management Control Information page through Management Control.

Device icon	Displays the connection status of the client device's BMC remote management controller. The client device's web console can be opened by clicking on the device icon.* To return to ASUS Control Center Express, click Sign Out on the left sidebar of the web console.
Login user	Displays the user account currently logged into the client device's BMC remote management controller. The login user can be switched.
Login status	Displays the current login status to the client device's BMC remote management controller.
Management controller	Displays the type of remote management controller of the client device.
IP address	Displays the IP address of the client device.
Management OEM status	Displays whether the client device supports OEM management functionality.
Model name	Displays the model name of the client device.
BIOS version	Displays the BIOS version of the client device.
BIOS build date	Displays the BIOS build date of the client device.
Firmware model	Displays the firmware model of the client device.
Firmware version	Displays the firmware version of the client device.
Firmware build date	Displays the firmware build date of the client device.
Power status	Displays the current power status of the client device.
LED status	Displays the status of the client device's LED indicators.
Uptime	Displays the uptime of the client device.
Timezone	Displays the timezone set for the BMC remote management controller.

5.7.1 Hardware Sensor (BMC)

This item allows you to view the voltage, temperature, fan speed, and sensor information of the client BMC device.

Hardware Sensor Refresh Time Stop Voltage CPU Voltage 8.000 V 3.3V Voltage 6.000 V 5V Voltage 8.000 V 12V Voltage 8.000 V Temperature CPU TEMPERATURE 31.000 °C CPU TEMPERATURE 30.000 °C CPU TEMPERATURE 30.000 °C

Refresh Time	Set the refresh time interval for the Hardware Sensor.
Voltage	Displays the voltage of the device hardware.
Current	Displays the current of the device hardware.
Temperature	Displays the temperature of the device hardware.
Fan	Displays the fan rotation speed of the device hardware.
VERSION_ERR sensor	Displays the status of the VERSION_ERR sensor.
Watchdog2 sensor	Displays the status of the Watchdog2 sensor.

5.7.2 Inventory (BMC)

This item allows you to view system, processor, memory, PCIE devices, PCIE functions, storage controller, and other hardware information.

Inventory Mode Hardware System Dedicated Desktop EnabledState Enabled IdentifyingDescriptions CIMGUID OtherIdentifyinginfo 0F0E00C0B0A0908706950403020100 PrimaryOwnerContact ManagedSystem PrimaryOwnerName SysAdmin RequestedState No Change

5.7.3 Control (BMC)

This item allows you to configure login credentials, ports, and LED indicators, clear CMOS, or remotely execute power control functions on a client device.

Power Control --Please Select-- Clear CMOS Clear CMOS Login Login Management Port Set Port LED Interval 10 Seconds LED --Please Select--

Power Control

Allows you to remotely execute power control functions on the client device through the BMC remote management controller, such as a system restart.

Power On (G0/S0)	Power on the client device through the BMC remote management controller.
Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off the client device through the BMC remote management controller.
Power Off - Hard (G3)	Force the client device to power off through the BMC remote management controller when the OS is unresponsive.
Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Restart the client device after shutting down from the OS through the BMC remote management controller.
Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	Power off and restart the client device through the BMC remote management controller.

Clear CMOS

Allows you to clear the CMOS of the client device's BIOS, restoring it to factory settings. The progress of the operation can be checked in the mission center.

• The client device must be powered off before the CMOS can be cleared.
• Availability of this function may depend on BIOS and BMC firmware support.

Login

Allows you to enter the account and password that ASUS Control Center Express will use to log into the client device's BMC remote management controller. After successfully logging in, the BMC remote management controller will automatically switch to the newly logged in account.

Login Account Password Save Cancel

Sync OEM Port

Allows you to synchronize the management port used for the BMC web console.

Set Port Management Port Save Cancel

• The management port must match the port used by the BMC web console or BMC functions will not be available.
• To set the default management port for all devices, click on Settings in the menu bar of the main control panel, then click Options > General Configuration, and scroll down to BMC Account > Management Port.

LED Interval

Allows you to set the state and blink interval of the client device's LED indicator.

LED On	The client device's LED indicator will turn on.
LED Off	The client device's LED indicator will blink on and off.
LED Interval	The client device's LED indicator will turn on for the specified interval, then return to the “off” state and blink on and off.

5.7.4 Remote Desktop (BMC)

The Remote Desktop function provides a flexible interface for out-of-band device management through the desktop accessed in ASUS Control Center Express. This method of remote desktop will allow you to control your client device even if it is not in an OS environment, such as BIOS.

Video	Pause Video	Pauses Console Redirection
	Resume Video	Resumes Console Redirection when the session is paused.
	Refresh Video	Updates the display shown in the Console Redirection window.
	Display On	Turns on the display of the client device
	Display Off	Turns off the display of the client device
	Capture Screen	Captures a screenshot of the Console Redirection screen.
Mouse	Show Client Cursor	Shows or hides the local mouse cursor on the client device
	Mouse Mode	Switches between Absolute, Relative, and Other mouse modes
Options	Zoom	Adjusts the zoom of the Console Redirection screen
	Block Privilege Request	Sets partial or no permissions for privilege requests
	Bandwidth	Adjusts the bandwidth used for Console Redirection
	Compression Mode	Sets the compression mode
	DCT Quantization	Adjusts the image quality for Console Redirection between 0 (best quality) to 7 (best performance)
Keyboard		Switches between U.S., German, and Japanese keyboard layouts
Send keys	Hold Down	Holds down the selected key on the client device
	Press and Release	Presses and releases the selected key on the client device
Hot Keys	Add Hot Keys	Creates a new hotkey. Click on Add Hot Keys > Add and place the cursor in the text box, then press then release the key combination to define a macro.
Video Record	Record Video	Starts recording the Console Redirection screen.
	Stop Recording	Stops recording the Console Redirection screen
	Record Settings	Configures the video recording settings

(continued on the next page)

Power	Remotely executes power control functions
Active Users Shows the currently	active users on the server.
Help	Displays additional information on H5Viewer
Browse File	Click this button to add or modify CD media such as a physical DVD/CD-ROM drive and CD image types such as .iso, then click Start Media to start or stop the redirection.
Start Media	Starts or stops redirection of the media file.

5.7.5 Smart BIOS (BMC)

This item allows you to update the BIOS of a device by uploading a BIOS file manually or from the BIOS Cache if the device cannot be powered on to perform a BIOS update or repair. You can also back up or restore the BIOS user profile and configuration settings.

• Availability of this function may depend on BIOS and BMC firmware support.
• The client device will begin updating the BIOS after shutting down. The update process may take a while, please wait for the update to be finished. Once the BIOS flash is finished the client device will restart.

DO NOT disconnect the power supply during the BIOS flash.

Flashing BIOS by manually uploading a BIOS file

Manually upload a BIOS file to flash the BIOS of the client device.

1. Select Manually Upload BIOS File in the BIOS Flash Type field.
2. Click on Browse to select a BIOS file, then click OK to confirm the BIOS file was uploaded successfully. The uploaded BIOS file will also be added to the BIOS Cache

3. Click on Flash BIOS.

Flash Mode will default to Hardware Mode.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management... Host Name IP Address Model Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date CESKTER-VEGECHE 762 MBU10 Pro MDS A370-A35 8021 08/01/2019 Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Manually Upload BIOS File Upload BIOS Uploaded BIOS File Browse Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS BIOS Cache

4. Select if you wish to perform a Normal Mode BIOS flash or if you wish to do a Recovery Mode BIOS flash, then click OK.

Performing a Recovery Mode BIOS Flash will reset all BIOS configurations. Some configuration data will be deleted. Please contact an ASUS service center for assistance after the Recovery Mode BIOS flash is completed.

Do you really want to update your BIOS? Normal Mode Recovery Mode (The data will not be saved) OK Cancel

Flashing BIOS from the BIOS cache

You can select a BIOS file from the BIOS cache.

1. Select Flash from BIOS Cache in the BIOS Flash Type field.
2. Select a BIOS file from the BIOS Cache List drop down menu.
3. Click on Flash BIOS.

Flash Mode will default to Hardware Mode.

BIOS BIOS Flash Management Host Name IP Address Momel Name BIOS Version BIOS Release Date OBSIOTOP-VISION.NET 102.MULT 10 Pte.WS.X070-ACE 0803 06/01/2019 Flash BIOS BIOS Flash Type Flash From BIOS Cache BIOS Cache List 0803 Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS

1. Select if you wish to perform a Normal Mode BIOS flash or if you wish to do a Recovery Mode BIOS flash, then click OK.

Performing a Recovery Mode BIOS Flash will reset all BIOS configurations. BIOS data and configuration settings will also be deleted. Please contact an ASUS service center for assistance after the Recovery Mode BIOS flash is completed.

Do you really want to update your BIOS? Normal Mode Recovery Mode (The data will not be saved) OK Cancel

1. (Optional) If you selected Recovery Mode, you will be prompted with a warning message, as Recovery Mode will remove all previous BIOS data and configurations. Click Flash to continue with using Recovery Mode.

Warning!! Emergency usage only!! With Recovery mode, BIOS data, settings will NOT be kept. Flash Cancel

Removing a BIOS file from the BIOS cache

You can view the BIOS files available for the client device in the BIOS Cache block. To remove a BIOS file from the BIOS Cache, check the BIOS file you wish to remove, then click on Remove.

BIOS Flash Type Manually Upload BIOS File Upload BIOS Upload BIOS File Browse Flash Mode Hardware Flash BIOS BIOS Cache Model Name Version Build Date File Size Pro. WIS 4578-RC2 0601 06/11/2019 32 M8 Remove

Downloading BIOS user profile data

• Availability of this function may depend on BIOS, IPMI, and BMC firmware support.
• Ensure that the client device has finished booting into the operating system before downloading BIOS user profile data.
• If a firmware update was recently completed, restart the client device before downloading BIOS user profile data.

• User profile data saved using BMC is not compatible with user profile configuration files created locally by the BIOS on client devices.

• Select a client device from the device list.

• Fill in the Download path and Download file name fields.
• Click Download to download the BIOS user profile data (.CMO).

Uploading BIOS user profile data

• After BIOS user profile data is uploaded, the client device(s) will automatically update BIOS settings upon the next startup. DO NOT disconnect the power supply or turn off the client device(s) during the BIOS settings update.
• To cancel a BIOS user profile data update, do not restart the client device and click Cancel.
• The BIOS version of the saved BIOS user profile data must match the BIOS version of the client device.
• It is not recommended to start BIOS OOB update and BIOS user profile update tasks simultaneously.

• Ensure that the current BIOS user profile data is backed up before uploading any BIOS user profile data.

• Fill in the Upload file path and User profile password (optional) fields.

• Click Upload to upload to a single client device, or Upload all devices to upload to multiple client devices.
• Once the upload is completed, restart the client device(s).

5.7.6 Firmware Update (BMC)

This item allows you to update the firmware of the BMC remote management controller, and also displays the results of the firmware update.

Uploading and updating firmware

1. Tick the checkbox for BMC under MC Platform
2. Click on Select File, then select your firmware file (.img) and click Open.
3. Click on Firmware Update, then wait for the update to be completed.
4. You can check the results of the firmware update in the Mission Center.
5. If the client device's firmware was updated while it was powered on, please reboot the client device after the firmware has been successfully updated.

Firmware Update MC Platform ■ MediaTek RTL0157 ■ BMC Firmware Information Firmware Version 1.01.5 Firmware Build Date Jan-27-2022 Send File Refresh Update Device List IP Address | USBD | MC | Current World | Status | 192 168.015 6abc3/192d94c201108/50034a0f7ea BMC 1.15 Support

5.7.7 Event Log (BMC)

This item allows you to view the event log of the last time the client device was powered on, giving you more information to analyze the cause of the problem or issue.

Please use the Notification Rule Management menu to manage which client devices, utilization status messages, hardware sensor events, or management controller alarms are shown in the Event Log. To set up notification rules,

please click on 📋 located at the top right menu bar of the Dashboard, then select Options > Rule Management. For more information, please refer to 8.1.2 Rule Management.

Event Log System - Information System - Mapping System - Error System - Critical System - Emergency System - Debug System - RealFunction System - Alert Error Audio Video Date | Step | Manage 2022-02-06 25:30:01 2022-02-06 25:31:01 2022-02-06 25:31:39 2022-02-06 25:31:39 2022-02-06 25:31:39 2022-02-06 25:31:39 2022-02-06 25:31:39 2022-02-06 25:31:38 2022-02-06 25:31:38 2022-02-06 25:31:38 2022-02-06 25:31:38 2022-02-06 25:31:38 2022-02-06 25:31:37 2022-02-06 25:31:37 2022-02-06 25:31:37 2022-02-06 25:31:37 2022-02-06 25:31:37 2022-02-06 25:31:36 2022-02-06 25:31:36 2022-02-06 25:31:36 2022-02-06 25:31:36 2022-02-06 25:31:36 2022-02-06 25:31:35 2022-02-06 25:31:35 2022-02-06 25:31:35 2022-02-06 25:31:34 2022-02-06 25:31:34 2022-02-06 25:31:34 2022-02-06 25:31:34 2022-02-06 25:31:34 data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data source: Data resource:

5.7.8 IPMI (BMC)

IPMI Tool Lanplus Command Redirect allows remote execution of commands to configure settings or view information on the client device.

IPMI Tool Longplus Command Radixet inc Systems code IPMD Event Generator CPassis Device Aux Firmware Rev Info xW5 xW8 xW9 xW10 MC not enough parameters given. MC Commands: reset gulo [auto]simlos[IPMS]rfc4122|damp] Info watchdog selftest Select File Cancel Apply

To execute commands on multiple client devices, please return to the main control panel and select the devices you wish to send commands to, then click Select Function > OOB - Control > IPMI > IPMI Tool Lanplus Command Redirect

In order to write FRU data, please unlock the FRU by executing the following command:

raw 0x30 0x17 0x01

Once the FRU is unlocked, execute the following command to write FRU data:

fru write

1. Select the desired command from the drop down menu.
2. Input any required and/or optional command parameters into the input box.

• The command parameters will be displayed in the input box.

• Click on ? to view additional information about the selected command.

• (Optional) Click Select File to upload a .bin file.

• Click Apply to execute the command. The progress of the command can be viewed in the mission center. Results of completed commands will be shown in the IPMI Tool window.

If the command was executed on multiple devices, you can click on the name of a device in the Device List to view the result of the completed command.

1. (Optional) Click Clear to clear the IPMI Tool window.

5.7.9 IPMI Serial-over-LAN (BMC)

This item allows you to access the serial console over Serial-over-LAN (SOL).

1. Click Start to start Serial-over-LAN via BMC on the client device.
2. Click Stop to end Serial-over-LAN via BMC on the client device.

IPMI SOL Serial Over Lan Stop Start Connect us: Name: 01. Version: Advanced Version, Manager, Book, Short, Manager & Data BNC Bndf Test Phase RAIDD Defined An Synthesis IVM BNC Version ID 32 Include if any type is empty BNC DevOps Review 83 No LED of the IPMI generation BNC Filmware Review 1.01.10 Help LNG Version 2.9 Help ATM/Blending Times [BLahan] Help Cd Wtd Time Timeout 10 Help Cd Wtd Time Fully [New] Help BNC MM Performance 40.61 Help HDD Light Speed Sensing [BLahan] System Reset Log Default Modulation BNC Network Configuration 12.100000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 Net system Reset Log 12.10000000000000000 12.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.2 System Reset Log 12.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.1.2 BNC Network Configuration 52.7555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555555 Net system Reset Log 62.77777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777777 System Reset Log 62.83333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

5.7.10 Settings (BMC)

This item allows you to configure BMC related settings.

1. After settings are changed, click on Save select device to update the selected client device with the new settings or click on Save all devices to update all BMC devices with the new settings.
2. Click on the id to confirm that the changes have been committed. The status of the operation can also be viewed in the Mission Center.

To show additional information about the settings, click the 📞n.

Settings Main Services Certificate Network GUID IP Address M&C Model Name 4ABCC12102CNE29T1000539324C0FTAE 192.168.0.35 BMC ROG STRX 2690-F GAMING WIFI Current Device 192.168.0.35 Save select device Save all device Date & Time Time zone GMT-05 Automatic NTP Date & Time Automatic PTP Date & Time Primary NTP Server pod.rtp.org Secondary NTP Server Grid rnt.gov LDAPIE-Directory Active Directory RADUIS KVM Mouse

Date & Time

This page allows you to set the date and time on the BMC.

Select Time Zone	Select the time zone from the Select Time Zone drop down menu.
Automatic NTP Date & Time	Enable or disable automatic time and date synchronization with the NTP server.
Primary NTP Server*	Allocate the primary NTP server to automatically update the date and time.
Secondary NTP Server*	Allocate the secondary NTP server to automatically update the date and time.
Automatic PTP Date & Time	Enable or disable the PTP server to automatically update the date and time.
PTP Interface*	Set the PTP server interface.
PTP Preset*	Set the PTP preset type to SlaveOnly or MasterSlave modes (default: SlaveOnly).
PTP Transport*	Set the PTP transport type to IPv4 or Ethernet modes (default: IPv4).
PTP Ipmode*	Set the PTP Ipmode to Unicast or Multicast modes.
PTP Unicast IP*	Set the Master IP address when PTP is in Unicast mode.
PTP Delay Mechanism*	Set the PTP delay mechanism to E2E or P2P (default: E2E).
PTP Inbound Latency*	Set the PTP inbound latency in nanoseconds (default: 0ns).
PTP Outbound Latency*	Set the PTP outbound latency in nanoseconds (default: 0ns).
PTP Priority1*	Set the priority of the PTP clock between 0 and 128 for the Master and 255 for the Slave.
PTP Max Master Capacity*	Set the max master capacity of the PTP clock (default: 5).
PTP Log Request Delay*	Set the PTP log request delay (default: 1).
Panic Mode*	Set PTP clock to not reset if jump is more than 1 second (default: unchecked).

* Only available when Automatic NTP Date & Time or Automatic PTP Date & Time is enabled.

LDAP/E-Directory

This item allows you to set the LDAP/E-directory Settings.

Enable LDAP/E-Directory Authentication	Enable or disable LDAP/E-Directory Authentication.
Encryption Type	Set the LDAP/E-Directory encryption type to No Encryption, SSL, or StartTLS.
Common Name Type	Set the Common Name Type to IP Address or FQDN.
Server Address	Set the LDAP/E-Directory server address.
Port Enter LDAP/E-Directory port.
Bind DN	Set the Bind DN used to authenticate the client in bind operations.
Password	Set the password used to authenticate the client during bind operations.
Search Base	Set which part of the external directory tree is searched by the LDAP/E-directory server.
Attribute of User Login	Set the attribute used to identify the client.
CA Certificate File*	Select the trusted CA certificate file.
Certificate File*	Select the client certificate file.
Private Key*	Select the private key file.

* Only available when SSL or StartTLS is enabled.

Active Directory Settings

This item allows you to set the Active directory Settings.

Enable Active Directory Authentication	Enable or disable Active Directory Authentication.
SSL	Enable or disable SSL encryption.
Secret Username	Set the Active Directory server administrator username.
Secret Password	Set the Active Directory server administrator password.
User Domain Name Set a domain name for the user.
Domain Controller Server Address 1-3	Enter the IP address of at least one Active Directory server.

RADIUS Settings

This item allows you to enable or disable RADIUS authentication and enter the required information to access the RADIUS server.

Enable RADIUS Authentication	Enable or disable RADIUS Authentication.
Server Address	Set the RADIUS server address
Port	Set the RADIUS server port.
Secret	Set the RADIUS server password.
Administrator*	Set the RADIUS administrator attribute.
Operator* Set the RADIUS operator attribute.
User*	Set the RADIUS user attribute.
OEM Proprietary*	Set the RADIUS OEM proprietary attribute.
No Access*	Set the RADIUM no access attribute.

* This advanced setting should be set according to the vendor-specific attributes for RADIUS users on the server.

KVM Mouse Setting

This item allows you to set the mouse mode.

Relative Positioning (Linux)	Calculated relative mouse position displacement is sent to the server.
Absolute Positioning (Windows)	Absolute position of the local mouse is sent to the server. This option is recommended for Windows or later versions on Linux.
Other Mode (SLES-11 OS Installation)	Calculated displacement from the local mouse in the center position is sent to the server.

Log Settings

This item allows you to set the log policy for the event log.

Linear Storage Policy	Set the SEL Log Setting Policy to Linear Storage.
Circular Storage Policy	Set the SEL Log Setting Policy to Circular Storage.

Advanced Log Settings

This item allows you to set advanced log settings for the event log.

System Log	Enable System Log to view all system events. Entries can be filtered based on their classification levels.
Local Log	Check this item to save the logs locally on the BMC device.
Remote Log	Check this item to save the logs in a remote machine.
Port Type	Set the port type to TCP or UDP.
File Size	Set the size of the local log file in bytes between 3 and 65535.
Rotate Count	When logged information exceeds the specified file size, old log information will automatically be rotated to backup based on the rotate count value.* Rotate count value must be 0 or 1. If the rotate count is 0, the old log information will be permanently cleared each time
Remote Log Server	Set the remote server address for the system log.
Remote Server Port	Set the port number for the system log.
Enable Audit Log	Enable this item to view all audit events for the client device.

Media Redirection Settings

This item allows you to set the media redirection settings.

• Availability of this function may depend on BMC support.
• Settings marked with an asterisk (*) are only available when the checkbox for CIFS is selected.

Local Media Support Enable or disable local media support.
Remote Media Support		Enable or disable remote media support. When enabled, CD/DVD and Hard disk remote media types will appear. Users can configure different settings for the different remote media types. Configuration options will be displayed for each media type, or the same options can be applied to both.
Mount CD/DVD	Server Address for CD/DVD Images	Enter the address of the server where the remote videos are stored.
	Path In Server	Enter the path of the media on the remote server.
	Share Type for CD/DVD	Set the share type to NFS or Samba (CIFS).
	Domain Name*	Enter the domain name of the remote server.
	Username*	Enter the username for the remote server.
	Password*	Enter the password for the remote server.
	Same Settings for Harddisk Images	Apply the server information entered for Mount CD/DVD to Mount Harddisk.
Mount Harddisk	Server Address for CD/DVD Images	Enter the address of the server where the remote videos are stored.
	Path In Server	Enter the path of the remote media on the server.
	Share Type for CD/DVD	Set the share type to NFS or Samba (CIFS).
	Domain Name*	(Optional) Enter the domain name of the remote media.
	Username*	Enter the username
	Password*	Enter the password

VMedia Instance Settings

This item allows you to configure settings for the redirection of virtual media to supported CD/DVD and/or hard disk devices.

Availability of certain functions depends on client device BMC support.

CD/DVD device instances	Select the number of CD/DVD devices to be supported for Virtual Media redirection.
Hard disk instances	Select the number of Hard disk devices to be supported for Virtual Media redirection.
Remote KVM CD/DVD device instances	Select the number of Remote KVM CD/DVD devices to be supported for Virtual Media redirection.
Remote KVM hard disk instances	Select the number of Remote KVM hard disk devices to be supported for Virtual Media redirection.
Emulate SD Media as USB disk on the host	Enable emulation of SD Media as an USB disk on the host.

Media Remote Session Settings

This item allows you to configure settings for the remote session.

KVM Single Port Application	Allows Single Port Application support in BMC.
Keyboard Language Select the keyboard language.
Virtual Media Attach Mode Select the Virtual Media Attach Mode.
Retry Count	Set the number of times to retry when a KVM failure occurs between 1 to 20.
Retry Time Interval (Seconds)	Set the number of seconds to wait for subsequent retries between 5 to 30 seconds.
Server Monitor OFF Features Status	Enable or disable the Server Monitor OFF feature.
Automatically OFF Server Monitor when KVM Launches	Enable to automatically turn off the monitor of the client device when KVM launches

PAM Order Settings

This item allows you to configure the PAM order for user authentication into the BMC. The list of PAM modules supported by the BMC is displayed. Drag and drop the PAM modules to reorganize their positions in the sequence.

SMTP Settings

This item allows you to configure the SMTP mail server.

LAN Interface Select the LAN interface to be configured.
Sender Email ID	Enter a valid Sender Email ID on the SMTP Server.Maximum allowed size for Email ID is 64 bytes, which includes username and domain name.
Primary/Secondary SMTP Support*	Enable or disable SMTP support for the BMC.
Primary/Secondary Server Name*	Enter the name of the SMTP server for reference purposes.
Primary/Secondary Server IP*	Enter the server address for the SMTP server.
Primary/Secondary SMTP Port*	Enter the SMTP port.
Primary/Secondary Secure SMTP Port*	Enter the SMTP secure port.
Primary/Secondary SMTP Authentication*	Enable or disable SMTP authentication.
Primary/Secondary Username*	Enter the username for the SMTP user account.
Primary/Secondary Password*	Enter the password for the SMTP user account.
Primary/Secondary SMTP SSLTLS Enable*	Enable or disable the SMTP SSLTLS protocol.
Primary/Secondary SMTP STARTTLS Enable*	Enable or disable the SMTP STARTTLS protocol.

* Only available when Primary SMTP or Secondary SMTP is enabled.

Firewall IP Address Rules

This item allows you to configure the firewall IP address rules.

IP Single (or) Range Start	Enter a single IP address or the start of an IP address range.
IP Range End (Optional) Enter the end of an IP address range.
Enable Timeout Enable or disable timeout.
Start Date* Set the date when the firewall rule comes into effect.
Start Time* Set the time when the firewall rule comes into effect.
End Date* Set the date when the firewall rule expires.
End Time* Set the time when the firewall rule expires.
Rule Allow or block the specified IP address or range.

* Only available when Enable Timeout is enabled.

Firewall IP Address Exist Rules

This item shows existing firewall rules. To remove an existing rule, click the X in the corresponding row.

Video Trigger Settings

This item allows you to configure the events that will trigger the auto video recording function of the KVM server.

Critical Events(Temperature/Voltage)	Enable or disable a trigger for the auto video recording function.
Non-critical Events(Temperature/Voltage)
Non-recoverable Events(Temperature/Voltage)
Fan State Changed Events
Watchdog Timer Events
Chassis Power On Events
Chassis Power Off Events
Chassis Reset Events
LPC Reset Events
Date and Time Events
Pre-Event Video Recordings	Enable Pre-Event Video Recordings and set recording to Pre-Crash or Pre-Reset.

Video Remote Storage Settings

This item allows you to configure video remote storage settings.

Record Video to Remote Server	Enable or disable Remote Video support.
Maximum Dumps Set the maximum dump limit between 1 and 100.
Maximum Duration	Set the maximum duration between 1 and 3600 seconds.
Maximum Size	Set the maximum size of dumps between 1 and 500 MB.
Server Address	Set the IP address of the remote server where the remote videos will be stored.
Path in Server Set the path of the media on the remote server.
Share Type Set the share type to NFS or Samba (CIFS).
Domain Name* Enter the domain name of the remote server.
Username* Enter the username for the remote server.
Password*	Enter the password for the remote server.

* Only available when CIFS is enabled.

Pre-Event Video Recording Settings

This item allows you to configure Pre-Event video recording settings.

To enable Pre-Event Video Recording, please go to the Video Trigger Settings section.

Video Quality Select the video quality.

Compression Mode Select the compression mode.

Frames Per Second Select the frames per second (FPS).

Video Duration Select the duration of the video recording in seconds.

SOL Trigger Settings

This item allows you to configure the events that will trigger Serial-over-LAN (SOL) video recording.

Critical Events(Temperature/Voltage)	Enable or disable a trigger for the auto video recording function.
Non-critical Events(Temperature/Voltage)
Non-recoverable Events(Temperature/Voltage)
Fan State Changed Events
Watchdog Timer Events
Chassis Power On Events
Chassis Power Off Events
Chassis Reset Events
LPC Reset Events
Date and Time Events

SOL Remote Video Settings

This item allows you to configure Serial-over-LAN (SOL) video recording settings.

Log Size Set the preferred size of the log file in KB up to 128KB.
Log File Count Set the number of log files between 0 and 1.
Record Video to Remote Server	Enable or disable storing recorded videos on a remote server instead of on the BMC.
Server Address*	Set the IP address of the remote server where the remote videos will be stored.
Path in Server* Set the path of the media on the remote server.
Share Type* Set the share type to NFS or Samba (CIFS).
Domain Name* Enter the domain name of the remote server.
Username* Enter the username for the remote server.
Password* Enter the password for the remote server.

* Only available when Record Video to Remote Server or CIFS is enabled.

SOL Recorded Video

This item shows existing Serial-over-LAN (SOL) recorded videos. Click on a video to download and save it. To delete a video, click the X in the corresponding row.

SOL Configuration

This item allows you to edit SOL configuration options.

Availability of this function depends on client device BMC support.

Volatile Bit Rate Set the volatile bit rate.

Non-volatile Bit Rate Set the non-volatile bit rate.

Fan Mode

This item allows you to view the current fan mode and switch between different fan modes.

Availability of certain fan modes depends on client device BMC support.

Generic Mode Set the fan of the client device to generic mode.

Full Speed Mode Set the fan of the client device to full speed mode.

Silent Mode Set the fan of the client device to silent mode.

Turbo Mode Set the fan of the client device to turbo mode.

Fan Customized

This item allows you to specify a custom fan curve.

Availability of this function depends on client device BMC support.

Fan Temperature Source

This item allows you to select a temperature sensor to control fan speed.

• If temperature information is unavailable, the CPU temperature will be used. If the CPU temperature is also unavailable, the fan speed will default to 60%.
• To use CHA_FAN sensor and control functions, please ensure that the fans are connected to the corresponding fan headers and that the 6-pin PSU connector is connected to a power supply.
• Fan speed control support depends on BMC, motherboard, BIOS, and firmware support.

PSU Redundancy

This item allows you to configure PSU redundancy settings, allowing you to focus system power consumption on one PSU device for improved power efficiency.

PSU Redundancy Enable or disable PSU Redundancy

* To use PSU Redundancy, the PSU PM_BUS header and SMART_PSU switch jumper must be activated.

Service Web Configuration

This item allows you to configure the Web service.

Active Enable or disable the Web service.
Interface Name Select the interface used for the Web service.
Secure Port	Enter the secure port used for the Web service.(default: 443)
Timeout	Configure the session timeout value in multiples of 60 seconds between 300 to 1800 seconds
Maximum Sessions Shows the maximum number of allowed sessions.

Service KVM Configuration

This item allows you to configure the KVM service.

Active Enable or disable the KVM service.
Interface Name Select the interface used for the KVM service.
Secure Port	Enter the secure port used for the KVM service.(default: 443)
Timeout	Configure the session timeout value in multiples of 60 seconds between 300 to 1800 seconds
Maximum Sessions Shows the maximum number of allowed sessions.

Service CD-Media Configuration

This item allows you to configure the CD-Media service.

Active Enable or disable the CD-Media service.
Interface Name Select the interface used for the CD-Media service.
Secure Port	Enter the secure port used for the CD-Media service. (default: 443)
Maximum Sessions Shows the maximum number of allowed sessions.

Service HD-Media Configuration

This item allows you to configure the HD-Media service.

Active Enable or disable the HD-Media service.
Interface Name Select the interface used for the HD-Media service.
Secure Port	Enter the secure port used for the HD-Media service. (default: 443)
Maximum Sessions Shows the maximum number of allowed sessions.

Service SSH Configuration

This item allows you to configure the SSH service.

Active Enable or disable the SSH service.
Interface Name Select the interface used for the SSH service.
Secure Port	Enter the secure port used for the SSH service.(default: 22)
Timeout	Configure the session timeout value in multiples of 60 seconds between 60 to 1800 seconds
Maximum Sessions Shows the maximum number of allowed sessions.

SSL Generate Certificate

This item will allow you to generate an SSL certificate. Click the Generate checkbox to show the SSL Generate Certificate section.

Common Name (CN) Set the common name of the generated certificate.
Organization (O) Set the organization of the generated certificate.
Organization Unit (OI) Set the organization unit of the generated certificate.
City or Locality (L) Set the city or locality of the organization.
State or Province (ST) Set the state or province of the organization.
Country (C) Set the country of the organization.
Email Address Set the email address of the organization.
Valid For	Set the requested validity period of the generated certificate between 1 and 3650 days.
Key Length Set the key length in bits of the generated certificate.

SSL Upload Certificate

This item will allow you to upload an SSL certificate. Click the Upload checkbox to show the SSL Upload Certificate section.

Current Certificate Shows the date and time of the current certificate.

New Certificate Select a new certificate file to upload.

Current Private Key Shows the date and time of the current private key.

New Private Key Select a new private key file to upload.

Current Certificate Information

This item will allow you to view information about the current certificate.

Network IP Configuration

This item will allow you to manage LAN support for the interface.

Enable LAN	Enable or disable LAN support for the selected interface.
LAN Interface Select the interface	to be configured.
MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the selected interface.
Enable IPv4 Enable or disable IPv4 for the selected interface.
Enable IPv4 DHCP	Enable or disable dynamic configuration of IPv4 addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
IPv4 Address* Set the static IPv4 address.

(continued on the next page)

IPv4 Subnet* Set the static subnet mask.
IPv4 Gateway* Set the static default gateway.
Enable IPv6 Enable or disable IPv6 for the selected interface.
Enable IPv6 DHCP	Enable or disable dynamic configuration of IPv6 addresses using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
IPv6 Index* Set the IPv6 Index.
IPv6 Address* Set the static IPv6 Address.
Subnet Prefix Length* Set the IPv6 Subnet Prefix length
IPv6 Gateway* Set the IPv6 Gateway
Enable VLAN	Enable or disable VLAN support for the selected interface.
VLAN ID Set the VLAN ID.
VLAN Priority Set the VLAN priority.

* Only available when DHCP is disabled and IPv4/IPv6 is enabled.

Network DNS Configuration

This item will allow you manage DNS settings.

DNS Enabled Enable or disable the DNS service.
mDNS Enabled Enable or disable Multicast DNS.
Host Name Setting Set Host Name configuration to Auto or Manual.
Host Name Set the Host Name if it is not configured automatically.
BMC Interface Shows the BMC Interface name.
Register BMC Enable or disable BMC registration.
Registration Method	Select from the following registration methods:- Nsupdate: Register with the DNS server using the nsupdate application.- DHCP Client FQDN: Register with the DNS server using DHCP option 81.- Hostname: Register with the DNS server using DHCP option 12.
TSIG Authentication Enabled Enable or disable TSIG authentication
Current TSIG Private File Info	Shows the date and time of the current TSIG Private File if TSIG Authentication is enabled.
New TSIG Private File	Select a new TSIG Private File to upload if TSIG Authentication is enabled.

(continued on the next page)

Domain Setting Set Domain configuration to Auto or Manual.
Domain Interface	Set the domain interface if the domain is configured automatically.
Domain Name	Set the domain name if the domain is configured manually.
Domain Name Server Setting	Set Domain Name Server configuration to Auto or Manual.
IP Priority	Set the IP priority if the Domain Name Server is configured automatically.
DNS Server 1-3	Set the DNS servers if the Domain Name Server is configured manually.

5.7.11 Configuration (BMC)

This item allows you to backup, restore, or factory reset configuration settings.

Configuration UUID IP Address MLC Model Name GABC12102C04E201100053RJECBFTAE Y82.16&0.35 BMC ROG STRIX ZERO-F GAMING WIFI Backup Download Check all SNMP KVM Network & Services IPM NTP Authentication SYBLOG Restore Save Config File Select Restore Factory Save Check all

Backup

1. To backup configuration settings, select the items you wish to backup by ticking the corresponding checkbox or select Check All to select all items at once.

2. Click Download to save the backup of the configuration settings to your backup location.

Restore

1. To restore the configuration settings from backup, click Select and choose a previously made backup file.
2. Click Save to restore the configuration settings from the backup file to the client device.

Restore Factory

1. To restore configuration settings to factory defaults, select the items you wish to reset by ticking the corresponding checkbox(es) or select Check All to select all items at once.
2. Click Download to save the backup of the configuration settings to your backup location.

Restoring settings to factory defaults cannot be undone. It is recommended that you create a backup of the current settings before restoring to factory defaults.

5.7.12 FRU Information (BMC)

This item shows information about the BMC's FRU (field replaceable unit) device, including basic information, chassis information, board information, and production information.

In order to write FRU data, please refer to the IPMI (BMC) section in this chapter.

FRU Information Available FRU Devices FRU Device ID 0 FRU Device Name SEEPROM Chassis Information Chassis Extra N/A Chassis Part Number 1.0 Chassis Serial Number 1.0 Chassis Type Main Server Chassis Chassis Information Area Format Version 1

5.7.13 Image Redirection (BMC)

This item allows you to select images to host as virtual media through BMC. You can start view, clear, and start redirection of available images.

• Availability of this function may depend on BMC support.
• Administrator privileges are required for image redirection.
• To configure the image, you need to enable Remote Media Support in Settings > Media Redirection > General Settings.
  • Supported CD/DVD formats: ISO9660, UDF(v1.02\~v2.60)
  • Supported CD/DVD media file types: (*.iso), (*.nrg)
  • Supported HDD media file types: (*.img), (*.ima)
  • Maximum media file size: 5GB

Image Redirection Media Type Media Instance Image Name Redirection Status Connected Server Session Ind... CD/DVD 0 winJoo Started with media boost 0 Hard disk 0 0114_2020 N/A

Redirecting local media

Start redirection	Click the ▶ Play button to redirect the selected image
Stop redirection	Click the ▶ Stop button to stop the remote image redirection.
Upload image	Click the ↑ Upload button to upload an image to the client device.* BMC functions will be unavailable until the upload is completed. Upload speed will depend on network connection and file size.** If an ongoing upload is cancelled, BMC functions will be temporarily unavailable while the system rolls back changes. If this fails to complete in a timely manner, try restarting the client device.
Clear	Click the ▶ Clear button to clear the selected image from the BMC.

Redirecting remote media

Start redirection	Click the Play button to redirect the selected image
Stop redirection	Click the Stop button to stop the remote image redirection.
Clear	Click the Clear button to clear the selected image from the BMC.

5.7.14 Platform Event Filters (BMC)

This item allows you to connect to the BMC web console of the client device to manage platform event filter settings, alert policies, and LAN destinations.

To return to ASUS Control Center Express, click Sign Out on the left sidebar of the web console.

5.7.15 BSOD Capture (BMC)

This item shows the last BSOD (Blue Screen of Death) captured by the BMC device to aid in investigating and diagnosing system abnormalities.

To enable BSOD Capture, the KVM service must be enabled through Settings > Services > KVM.

Last BSOD Screen Captured Your PC ran into a problem and needs to restart We're just collecting some error info, and then we'll restart for you. 0% complete For more information about this issue and possible tasks, we will https://www.bosod.com/sqzgs.exe For call up your computer, please check the log file: BOSOD - 500132.16.2018.06 the ticket: https://bosod.com/sqzgs.exe/[e-mail]

5.7.16 Error Codes (BMC)

0x83100002	Client device does not support BMC.
0x83100003	Command invalid.
0x83100025	Client device must be powered off to clear CMOS.
0x83100026	Check if the SPI connector is connected to the IPMI TPM connector on the motherboard.
0x83100033	Could not connect to the BMC web interface.
0x83100034	BMC login credentials incorrect.
0x83100006	Could not synchronize BMC functions. Check network connectivity and try again. If this issue persists, shut down the client device, disconnect the power, then restart the client device.
0x831F4077	Could not log into BMC on the client device. Check if BMC is working correctly on the client device or reenter BMC login credentials and try again. If this issue persists, shut down the client device, disconnect the power, then restart the client device.
0x831F4038	No response received from BMC on the client device. If this issue persists, shut down the client device, disconnect the power, then restart the client device.

5.8 Metadata Management

This item allows you to add or edit metadata fields and information which is displayed when viewing device information.

To access Metadata Management, click on located at the top right menu bar.

AOSI Creator Center Expense Metadata Management Data Selection to Search... Enter Edit User... Export Options Alias User Microsoft Excel Save Microsoft Windows Save Microsoft Web Save

5.8.1 Adding metadata fields

1. Click on Editor.

AUS Censor Center Express Metadata Management Phase Select to switch... Delete Delete List Export Options Alias Name DISCKUP DATA Size DISCKUP COMBIM Size DISCKUP MUSEUM Save

1. Enter the name of the metadata field you would like to add, then click on Add.

Metadata Editor Field Name Add Field Name Owner Exit

1. Your new metadata field should appear in the metadata management list, click on Save to save the changes done.

For this example we have added the "Location" metadata field.

Auto Ceramic Center Express Metadata Management Press Origin to access... Editor Match Out Export Options Alias Origin Location GOVERNMENT Size GOVERNMENT Size DESPRING MUSEUM Tens

5.8.2 Removing metadata fields

1. Click on Editor.

Adobe Creative Center Express Metadata Management Press Event to search... Delete Catch Unit Export Options Alias Driver Microsoft Excel Sub Microsoft CSNSM Sub Microsoft SQL Save

2. Click on the X next to the metadata field you would like to remove, then click Yes.

Metadata Editor Field Name Add Field Name Owner Exit

5.8.3 Updating the metadata manually

You can edit the default metadata such as Alias, or user defined metadata of each device by double clicking on the cell of the field you would like to update, then clicking on Save once you are finished to save the changes made. Allowing you to quickly edit the metadata of multiple devices.

Auto Control Center Expense Metadata Management Phase Event to Search... Delete Select Ids Export Options Alias General DEMOOD-BYFRES Save DEMOOD-COMERS Save DEMOOD-RESEARCH Save Save

5.8.4 Updating the metadata using a batch update

1. First export a .csv file of the metadata fields you wish to populate by clicking on Export.

To customize which metadata fields to export, click on Options, then select the metadata fields you wish to export. Deselecting a metadata field will hide the metadata field and will not add that field to the exported .csv file.

AOSI Control Center Expense Metadata Management Pres 'Enter' to search... Editor Match Upd... Export Options Alias Done Location DBSCTOP-027456 box DBSCTOP-027456M box DBSCTOP-027456K Save

1. Update the exported .csv file with the data you wish to populate the metadata fields on ASUS Control Center Express.
2. Click on Batch Update, then select the .csv file you updated and click Open. Your metadata fields should be populated with the information on the .csv file.

AUS Control Center Interface Metadata Management Prase Order to Search... Delete Search Topic Export Options Alias Done Location DESKTOP ACTION Sim DESKTOP Python Sim DESKTOP AVOCOS Save

1. Click on Save to save the changes made.

Auto Control Order Expense Metadata Management Press Default to search... Delete Batch Usq Export Options Alias Create Location CREATEOP-2370015 Sim MS CREATEOP-CATHROOM Sim SaaS Branch CREATEOP-MUSON Help Make Address Save

5.9 Software Management

This item provides centralized software management, such as dispatching software setup and script files to selected devices, adding software packages to the Software Pool, view software information, blacklisting software, or setting software rules on selected client devices.

5.9.1 Software Dispatch

This item allows you to dispatch software setup and script files.

To access Software Dispatch, select the client device(s) then click on Select Function > Software Management > Software Dispatch.

Dispatching software to client device

1. Select the Setup File and Script File you would like to upload and dispatch to the client device.

• Supported file formats: (Windows) .zip, .exe, or .msi (Linux) .deb, .rpm, .tar, .tar.gz, .tar.xz, .tar.bz2
• The file size of the setup file should not exceed 1.0 GB.
• If you need to package the software setup file and batch file into a zip file, rename the batch file to install_script.bat (Windows) or install_script.sh (Linux) before packaging the files.
• On Linux-based main servers, copy the software files to /etc/APRODATA/ WORKDIR/ using the command sudo cp -r ./“” “” or equivalent.

Software Dispatch Connection Host Name IP Address OS Information Model Name Define DESKTOP-VIUGC.NVI 182.168.0.70 Windows Pro: W5.XSTB-ACC Dispatch Task Setup File: Select File:cpsz-1.844-cn.exe Script File: Select File(install_script_withoutNetwork.bat *The setup file format must be.zip, .exe, or .rml / File Size Maximum: 1.8GB ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client and completed setup. ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client, OK

1. (optional) Select the notification scenario for when the script has been successfully sent to the client and completed setup, or if the script has been successfully sent to the client.

Software Dispatch Connection Host Name P Address OS Information工程项目 Name Online SECTOR-WGCSN MS-USB-RD Windows Pro WGCSN-ACI Dispatch Task Setup File: Sect File:cpsr_1.844-cn.exe Script File: Select File(install_script_withoutNetwork.bat) 'The setup file format must be.zip.exe, or mail / File Size Maximum: 1.905 ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client and completed setup. ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client. OK

1. Click on OK, then wait for the software dispatch process to finish. Once it is completed you should receive a notification based on the notification scenario selected.

Software Dispatch Connection | Host Name | IP Address | OS Information | Model Name | Online | DESCOP-WGSCNB | 182.1605.70 | Windows | Pro WIS.XGSS-ACE Dispatch Task Setup File: Select File: opusz_1.844-cn.exe Script File: Select File: install_script_withoutNetwork.bat *The setup file format must be zip, axis, or mail / File Size Maximum: 1.800 ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client and completed setup. ● Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client. OK

The software dispatch process will not display any software installation user interface or notices. Ensure the software you dispatch supports silent mode - an installation that requires no user interaction, and has a script file to execute the installation process in order for the software to automatically install in the background.

1. The dispatch progress and results can be viewed in the Mission Center. If the dispatch was successful, Success will be displayed in the Task Status column.

Software Dispatch Report IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Mer 192.168.0.100 W480 | Success 192.168.0.104 DESKTOP-S3/GSPF7 | Success OK

If the dispatch was unsuccessful, Fail will be displayed in the Task Status column, and a dispatch message code will be displayed in the Message column. Please refer to the table below for the dispatch message codes.

Software Dispatch Report IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Message | 192.168.0.190 DESKTOP-20DE43B | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.55 DESKTOP-7609770 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.75 DESKTOP-B9713D4 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.13 DESKTOP-SG51DEP | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.14 DESKTOP-3SR3R27 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.18 DESKTOP-82N6US5 | Fail | 0x81E00008 OK

Message code Details
0x81E00000	Unable to retrieve data returned by the server.
0x81E00004	Unable to parse data returned by the server.
0x81E00007	Unable to obtain data returned by the client device.
0x81E00008	Please check the connection status of the client device.

The setup results can also be viewed in the Software Dispatch Report

Software Dispatch Report IP Address Status 192.168.0.100 Dispatch successful. Result = 1619

• Please refer to the MsiExec.exe and InstMsi.exe error message descriptions if the software dispatch results and message codes were returned by the Windows Installer response file script.
• Software installation may be affected by the OS anti-virus. If you are certain there are no problems with the software package and script file but the installation is still unsuccessful, you can try temporarily disabling the anti-virus on the client device during the dispatch and installation process.

5.9.2 Software Pool

You can dispatch, remove or modify software packages uploaded to your software pool.

To access the software pool, select the client device(s) and click on Select Function > Software Management > Software Dispatch, then scroll to the bottom of the Software Dispatch screen.

• Supported file formats: (Windows) .zip, .exe, or .msi (Linux) .deb, .rpm, .tar, .tar.gz, .tar.xz, .tar.bz2
• The file size of the setup file should not exceed 1.0 GB.

Adding software packages to the Software Pool

1. Click on Add.

Software Pool Software Name | OS Information | Platform. | Version | Created Time | Size | Description | Script File | Setup File | Add Modify

1. Enter the required information into the Software Name, OS Type, Platform, and Version fields. You may also type in a brief description of the software package into the Description field.

Add Software Package Software Name Google Chrome OS Type Windows 10 Platform 32 bit Version 1.0.0.0 Description Install stand alone Chrom Setup File: Select File googlechromestandaloneenterprise64.msi Script File: Select File install_chrome.bat Cancel Save

1. Select the Setup File and Script File you would like to upload. Click on Save once you have finished.

Add Software Package Software Name Google Chrome OS Type Windows 10 Platform 37.bat Version 1.0.0.0 Description Install stand alone Chrom Setup File: Select File googlechromestandaloneenterprise64.msi Script File: Select File install_chrome.bat Cancel Save

1. The added software package should appear in the Software Pool list.

Software Pool Software Name OS Information Platform Version Created Time Size Description Script File Seta File Google Chrome Windows 10 32 bit 18.00 96/20/01, 5:45:58 PM 90% Install start Install dim... connectdots... Add Modify

Dispatching software using the Software Pool

1. Click on the software package you would like to dispatch from the Software Pool.

Software Pool Software Name OS Information Platform Version Credit Time Size Descriptions controlled Script File Seta File Google Channel Windows 10 32-bit 1.000 2/6/2018 5:45:38 PM 90% Install here... retail miss... projections... Add Modify

1. Select the notification scenario, then click on Dispatch. Once the software dispatch process is completed you should receive a notification based on the notification scenario selected.

Dispatch Task: Google Chrome Software Name: Google Chrome OS Type: Windows 10 Platform: 32 bit Version: 1.0.0.0 Create Time 9/6/2019, 5:43:30 PM Description: Install stand alone Chrome Script File: install_chrome.bat Setup File: googlechromestandaloneenterprise64.msi • Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client and completed setup. • Inform me when the script has been successfully sent to the client. Cancel Dispatch

The software dispatch process will not display any software installation user interface or notices. Ensure the software you dispatch supports silent mode - an installation that requires no user interaction, and has a script file to execute the installation process in order for the software to automatically install in the background.

1. The dispatch progress and results can be viewed in the Mission Center. If the dispatch was successful, Success will be displayed in the Task Status column.

Software Dispatch Report IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Mer 192.168.0.100 W480 | Success 192.168.0.104 DESKTOP-S3/GSPF7 | Success OK

If the dispatch was unsuccessful, Fail will be displayed in the Task Status column, and a dispatch message code will be displayed in the Message column. Please refer to the table below for the dispatch message codes.

Software Dispatch Report IP Address | Host Name | Task Status | Message | 192.168.0.190 DESKTOP-20DE43B | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.55 DESKTOP-7609770 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.75 DESKTOP-B9713D4 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.13 DESKTOP-SG51DEP | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.14 DESKTOP-3SR3R27 | Fail | 0x81E00008 192.168.0.18 DESKTOP-82N6US5 | Fail | 0x81E00008 OK

Message code Details
0x81E00000	Unable to retrieve data returned by the server.
0x81E00004	Unable to parse data returned by the server.
0x81E00007	Unable to obtain data returned by the client device.
0x81E00008	Please check the connection status of the client device.

• Please refer to the MsiExec.exe and InstMsi.exe error message descriptions if the software dispatch results and message codes were returned by the Windows Installer response file script.
• Software installation may be affected by the OS anti-virus. If you are certain there are no problems with the software package and script file but the installation is still unsuccessful, you can try temporarily disabling the anti-virus on the client device during the dispatch and installation process.

Modifying a software package

1. Check the software package you would like to modify from the Pool, then click on Modify.

Software

Software Pool Software Name OS Information Platform Version Created Time Size Description Script File Setup File Google Chrome Windows 10 32 bit 1.8.6.0 9M/2019, S:40:38 PM 50%P... Install stand... install.chro... googlechro... Add Modify

1. You can edit the Version and Description, once you have finished, click on Save to save the changes made.

Edit Software Package Software Name Google Chrome OS Type Windows 10 * Platform 32 bit * Version 1.0.0.0 Create Time 9/6/2019, 5:43:30 PM Description Install stand alone Chrom Script File: install_chrome.bat Setup File: googlechromestandaloneenterprise64.msi Cancel Remove Save

Deleting a software package

1. Check the software package you would like to delete from the Software Pool, then click on Modify.

Software Pool Software Name OS Information Platforms Version Created Time Size Description Script File Setup File Google Clouds Windows 12 32 bit 1.8.0 95/03/10, C:40.08 PM 96/7E... Initial island... email class... goq@dbhct... Add Modify

1. Click on Remove to remove the software package from the Software Pool.

Edit Software Package Software Name Google Chrome OS Type Windows 10 Platform 32-bit Version 1.0.0.0 Create Time 9/6/2019, 5:43:30 PM Description Install stand alone Chrom Script File: install_chrome.bat Setup File: googlechromestandaloneenterprise64.msi Cancel Remove Save

5.9.3 Software Information

You can view the information on Application, Processes, Services and Environment variables of multiple devices, by selecting the client device(s) you wish to view software information on and clicking on Select Function > Software Management > Software Information.

Click on a device in the top block of the Software Information screen and the Application, Processes, Services, and Environment variables of the selected device should be displayed in the different tabs below.

Some operating system applications, processes, and services cannot be removed, terminated, or stopped.

Software MAC Address Host Name Username IP Address 80-85:81-83-98 DESKTOP-T27H0M ASUS 182.168.16 80-85-86-88-80-86 DESKTOP-VI0204 TPDC 182.168.10 Application Processes Services Environment Name Value ALU22070CPJL C:\ProgramData

Application tab

The Application tab allows you to view information on applications installed on the selected client device. You may also click on an application then select Uninstall to uninstall the application on all selected devices.

- The Uninstall button will be grayed out if the uninstall option is unavailable for the selected application.

- Click on the (fresh) button to immediately refresh and update the software list.

Processes tab

The Processes tab allows you to view information on active processes. You may also click on a process then select End Task to end the process.

Environment tab

The Environment tab allows you to view information on the common environment variables.

Services tab

The Services tab allows you to view information on the services available on the selected device. You may click on a service then choose to start the service by clicking on Start, or stop a running process by clicking on Stop.

5.9.4 Software Blacklist

This item is only supported on Windows-based client devices.

You can add software to the software blacklist of all selected devices.

To access the Software Blacklist, select the client device(s) and click on Select Function > Software Management > Software Blacklist.

Adding a software to the Software Blacklist

1. Click on Add.

Software Blacklist MASC Address Host Name Operator IP Address 0F-59-4C 68-59-56 GEMICOF-WGSCN4 SPDOC 152.968.03 Software Blacklist Add Remover □ Software Name

2. Enter the name of the software you wish to blacklist, then click on Save.

Add Software Software Name Save

Ensure to enter the full name of the software you wish to blacklist, for example cmd.exe. You can view the full name of the software from the Software Information page in ASUS Control Center Express, or through the Windows command line/Task Manager. For more information, please refer to the Software Information section in this chapter.

Removing a software from the Software Blacklist

Select the software from the Software Blacklist and click on Remove, then click on OK.

Software Blacklist MAC Adding Host Name Username IP Address UD-03-4C-08-09-06 DESKTOP-VS-000M TPOOC 132.768510 Software Blacklist Add Remove Software Name Messaging Application Gaming Platform

5.9.5 Installer

This item will allow you to download and update the driver, utility application, and BIOS for a single or multiple devices. For more information on the Installer, please refer to the Installer section of the Device Information chapter.

5.9.6 Software Rule Management

The Software Rule Management allows you to manage software applications the user may install on the client device through setting software rules. You may apply whitelist and blacklist rules to software and when the user installs a software that violates the whitelist rule or complies to the blacklist rule, an email notification will be sent to user-defined receivers notifying them of this software installation.

To access the Software Rule Management, select the client device(s) and click on Select Function > Software Management > Software Rule Management.

- This item is only supported on Windows-based client devices.

- Ensure the SMTP settings are set and can receive the test email before using the Software Rule Management function. For more information please refer to the SMTP Settings section in the Settings chapter.

- A notification email will be sent for each violated/met condition which would send a notification email, for example, if a software was installed on the client device, and it met a blacklist condition and violated a whitelist condition at the same time, two notification emails would be sent.

- If a software that does not comply to the software rules was installed on a client device that is offline, the system will check for violations and send notification emails once the device is online.

Software Rule Management Rule List Add Rule Name Discus Edit Detect White List - Text [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # White List - Text [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # White List - R & O [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Green Software [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Security [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # White List - Licensed Software [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Unlicensed Software [e-mail] [e-mail] ✓ # Mail Content Update Hi Sir, The following devices violate software installation rules. Please check & handle them as soon as possible. Host Name: DESKTOP-71F49BA IP Address: 192.168.0.3 Install unlicensed software Host Name: DESKTOP-3ECEB6S IP Address: 192.168.0.137

Adding a new rule to the Rule List

1. Click on Add.

Rule List Add Rule Name Release Start Data White List - Test [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # White List - Test [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # White List - R & O [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Green Software [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Security [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # White List - Licensed Software [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Unlicensed Software [e-mail]/[e-mail] ✓ #

2. Enter the required information into the Basic Information block.

Add Rule Basic information Rule Name Licensed software - office tool Display Name Licensed software rule

Rule Name	Enter the rule name.
Display Name	Enter the email title of the notification email for this rule.

1. Select whether to add a Blacklist or Whitelist condition, then select the Type and Condition and enter keywords for the rule into the Data field. Click Add to add the blacklist or whitelist condition.

• If a blacklist condition and a whitelist condition contradict with each other, the system will prioritize the blacklist condition.
• If multiple keywords are entered for a single blacklist/whitelist condition, if any one of the keywords meet the condition or violate the condition set, the blacklist/whitelist condition will be valid.
• If multiple blacklist/whitelist conditions are set within a single rule, all conditions have to be valid for the rule to take effect.

- When entering multiple keywords, press after each keyword to separate the keywords.

- The information displayed for may differ between softwares, we recommend referring to the software information displayed in Control Panel > Programs > Programs and Features.

Organize Name ASUS Control Center Express Google Chrome Microsoft OneDrive Microsoft Visual C++ 2015-2019 Redistributable (x84) ... Microsoft Visual C++ 2015-2019 Redistributable (x86) ... Realtek High Definition Audio Driver WinFlash Publisher ASUS Google LLC Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Corporation Realtek Semiconductor Corp. ASUSTek COMPUTER INC. Installed On Size 443 MB 109 MB 23.1 MB 20.1 MB 6/18/2020 6/18/2020 5.78 MB 84.0.4147.89 18.143.0717.0002 14.21.27702.2 14.21.27702.2 6.0.1.8393 3.2.9.1

- For a full list of the whitelist and blacklist conditions, please refer to the Whitelist conditions and Blacklist conditions section.

Blacklist Add Type Compare Data Software Name contain Microsoft Office 2015 Microsoft Office 2016 Adobe DC Photoshop Software version >= 16.0 Publisher contain Microsoft Corporation Adobe Systems Incorporated Installation Date >= 2020/01/04

Blacklist / Whitelist	Set the rule as a Blacklist or Whitelist condition.
Type	Select the type of data (Software Name, Software Version, Publisher, Installation Date) you would like to enter into the Data field as blacklist or whitelist keywords.
Compare	Select the comparison condition, the options available may vary according to the Type selected.
Data	Enter keywords which correspond to the Type selected as the keywords to compare.

1. Repeat step 3 to add more blacklist or whitelist conditions.
2. Enter the email addresses the notifications should be sent to, then enter the email content for the notification email and click Update once you are finished with the email content.

When entering multiple emails, press after each email to separate the emails.

Mail list [e-mail] [e-mail] EX: [e-mail]:[e-mail]; Mail Content Update Hi Sir, The following devices violate software installation rules. Please check & handle them as soon as possible. Host Name: DESKTOP-71F498A IP Address: 192.168.0.3 Install unlicensed software Host Name: DESKTOP-3ECEB65 IP Address: 192.168.0.137

1. Click on Next once you are finished.
2. Select the client devices you want to apply this software rule to, then click Save to finish adding the software rule.

Licensed software - office tool Host List Host Name OS Information IP Address DESKTOP-82N6USS Won10(04) 192.164.0.18 DESKTOP-5G5DEP Won10(04) 192.164.0.13 Preview Save

Whitelist conditions

Type Compare Data
Software Name	Contains	If a software installed on the client device matches a software name entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device does not match a software name entered, a notification email will be sent.
	Does not contain	If a software installed on the client device does not match a software name entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device matches a software name entered, a notification email will be sent.
Version	>	If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
	<	If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
	=	If a software installed on the client device is the same version as a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is not the same version as a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
	!=	If a software installed on the client device is not the same version as a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is the same version as a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
	>=	If a software installed on the client device is a higher version or equal to a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.

(continued on the next page)

Version <=		If a software installed on the client device is a lower version or equal to a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
Developer	Contains	If a software installed on the client device matches a developer entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device does not match a developer entered, a notification email will be sent.
	Does not contain	If a software installed on the client device does not match a developer entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device matches a developer entered, a notification email will be sent.
Installation Date	>	If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
	<	If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
	=	If a software's installation date on the client device is equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is not equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
	!=	If a software's installation date on the client device is not equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.

(continued on the next page)

Installation Date	>=	If a software's installation date on the client device is later or equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
	<=	If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier or equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.

Blacklist conditions

Type Compare Data
Software Name	Contains	If a software installed on the client device matches a software name entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device does not match a software name entered, no notification email will be sent.
	Does not contain	If a software installed on the client device does not match a software name entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device matches a software name entered, no notification email will be sent.
Version	>	If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
	<	If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
	=	If a software installed on the client device is the same version as a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is not the same version as a version entered, no notification email will be sent.

(continued on the next page)

Version	!=	If a software installed on the client device is not the same version as a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is the same version as a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
	>=	If a software installed on the client device is a higher version or equal to a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a lower version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
	<=	If a software installed on the client device is a lower version or equal to a version entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device is a higher version than a version entered, no notification email will be sent.
Developer	Contains	If a software installed on the client device matches a developer entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device does not match a developer entered, no notification email will be sent.
	Does not contain	If a software installed on the client device does not match a developer entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software installed on the client device matches a developer entered, no notification email will be sent.
Installation Date	>	If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
	<	If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.

(continued on the next page)

Installation Date	=	If a software's installation date on the client device is equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is not equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
	!=	If a software's installation date on the client device is not equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is equal to a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
	>=	If a software's installation date on the client device is later or equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.
	<=	If a software's installation date on the client device is earlier or equal to a date entered, a notification email will be sent.
		If a software's installation date on the client device is later than a date entered, no notification email will be sent.

Modifying a software rule

1. Click on next to the rule you wish to modify.
2. Click on Next once you are finished modifying the rule.
3. Select the client devices you want to apply this software rule to, then click Save to finish modifying the software rule.

Rule List Add Rule Name Controller Rule Depets White List - Tool [e-mail]@[e-mail] White List - Test [e-mail]@[e-mail] White List - R & D [e-mail]@[e-mail] Black List - Grade Software [e-mail]@[e-mail] Black List - Security [e-mail]@[e-mail] White List - Licensed Software [e-mail]@[e-mail] Black List - Unlicensed Software [e-mail]@[e-mail]

Deleting a software rule

1. Click on next to the rule you wish to delete.

Rule List Admin Name Run name CEdit Delete White List - Tool [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # White List - Test [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # White List - R & D [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Open Software [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Security [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # White List - Licensed Software [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ # Black List - Unlicensed Software [e-mail][e-mail] ✓ #

1. Click on Delete to delete the software rule.

Are you sure you would like to delete this rule? [White List - R & D] Cancel Delete

5.10 Task Scheduler

You can set scheduled tasks for client devices to execute on set dates, or set them to repeat periodically. To begin setting tasks, please select the device(s) you would like to schedule tasks for from the Devices list, then select the Task Scheduler function from the Select function drop down list of functions.

5.10.1 Task scheduler calendar overview

You can view the tasks already set on the task scheduler calendar.

Previous month / week / day Next month / week / day Return to current day Task Scheduler List of Tasks Add Toggle between month, week, or day view September 2019 mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse mouse boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxerot boxeroti boxeroti

5.10.2 Setting a new task

1. Select the devices you would like to set a new scheduled task for.

Classic view

Graphical view

ASUS Connection (m) 150 Hardware Tools... 345 Emigration 345 Reset Long 192.168.101 type: management software searching/visual Threshold Select Function

1. Click on menu. Select function, then select Task Scheduler from the drop down

3. Click on Add.

Task Scheduler List of Tasks Add Today September 2019 month week day Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10:25 BOS flash 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 0:00 Power off device 12:00 USB enable 0:00 Reboot 10:55 Updaher disable 18:00 BOS flash +2 more 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Reboot 12:00 USB enable 10:55 Service update 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

4. Enter the Taskset name .

The Taskset name cannot be changed after you have created the task.

Taskset Editor Host Route IP Address OS Information.Model Name DECOOP-DOCSOR 150.000/76 Windows Pro WORKS/O-US Taskset Information Taskset Name: Task 1 Start Date & Time: Repetition Schedule: Repeat Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Add Task

1. Select a Start Date & Time. If you want the task to repeat for a set period of time, check Repeat, then select the End Date & Time.

The End Date & Time field will only appear when you check Repeat.

Taskset Editor Host Name IP Address OS Information Masket Name DESKTOP-HUGGER ISO 1880.19 Windows Pw WD ESTO-ACE Taskset Information Taskset Name: Task 1 Start Date & Time: 2019 09 08 - 15:00 End Date & Time: 2019 09 29 - 00:00 Repetition Schedule: Rupeat Daily Weekly Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Add Task

1. (optional) If you checked Repeat in the previous step, select if you want the task to repeat Daily or Weekly. Selecting Weekly will allow you to choose the day you wish to repeat the task each week.

Taskset Editor Next Name IP Address OS Information Model Name DEBITDA-VEGGINER 162.168.0.10 Windows Pres WS X37D-ACS Taskset Information Taskset Name: Task 1 Start Date & Time: 2019 09 08 - 15:00 End Date & Time: 2019 09 29 - 00:00 Repetition Schedule: Repeat Daily Weekly Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Add Task

1. Click on Add Task and select Software for software based functions, Hardware for management functions, or DASH or vPro for power control functions.

Hardware functions are only available on client devices connected using a management LAN port which supports remote management controller.

Add Task Software Action Type Power Control Delay Time 0 Minute The time that the task execution is delayed. Power Action ● Power Off ● Power On ● Power Reboot Cancel Save

1. Select an Action Type from the drop down menu. You may refer to the tables on the next page for a brief overview of the Action Type options.

Add Task Action Type Power Control Delay Time 0 Minute The time that the task execution is delayed. Power Action ● Power Off ● Power On ● Power Reboot Cancel Save

Software

Action type A	Action options Description
Power Control	Power Off Power off device
	Power On Power on device
	Power Reboot Restart device
Service Control	Service Name Enter the name of the service
	Start Start the service
	Stop Stop the service
	Restart Restart the service
Software Dispatch	Package Name Select a software package from the Software Pool
Security and Boot	Registry Tool	Enable Enable Windows Registry Editor
		Disable Disable Windows Registry Editor
	USB Control	Enable Enable the USB ports
		Disable Disable the USB ports
		Read Only Set the USB to Read Only privileges
	Fast Startup*	Enable Enable Fast Startup
		Disable Disable Fast Startup
	Windows Update*	Enable Enable Windows Update
		Disable Disable Windows Update
BIOS Cache	BIOS Cache List Select a BIOS file from the BIOS cache list

* Only supported on Windows-based client devices

• BIOS Cache tasks may fail to complete if a BitLocker or fTPM risk is detected. It is strongly recommended to resolve these risks before proceeding. Refer to the BIOS section in the Device Information chapter for more information.
• If you understand the risks involved, check Allow updating BIOS when BitLocker is unsuspended or unknown, Allow updating BIOS when BitLocker automatic backup of recovery key failed, and Allow erasing fTPM security data when updating BIOS when creating a BIOS Cache task to ignore these risks and proceed anyway.

Hardware

Action type	Action options Description
Power Control	Power Off Power off device
	Force Power Off Force	power off device
	Power On Power on device
	Power Reboot Restart device
Enable / Disable WatchDog	Heartbeat Interval Set the heartbeat interval
	Enable Enable Watchdog
	Disable Disable Watchdog
Clear CMOS	- Clear the CMOS of device
Enable / Disable KVM	Enable Enable KVM

* These Action Categories are only supported on motherboards which support remote management controllers.

Action type	Action options Description
Power Control	Power On (G0/S0) Power on device
	Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off device
	Power Off - Hard (G3)	Force device to power off .
	Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Restart device after shutting down the OS
	Sleep - Deep (G1/S3)	Enter sleep mode (G1/S3)
	Master Bus Reset Reset the hardware
	Hibernate (G1/S4) Enter hibernate mode (G1/S4)
	Restart Computer to BIOS	Enter BIOS after restarting device
	Power On to BIOS Enter BIOS after powering on device
	Restart Computer to IDE-R Floppy	Enter IDE-R floppy drive after restarting device
	Power On to IDE-R Floppy	Enter IDE-R floppy drive after powering on device
	Restart Computer to IDE-R CDROM	Enter IDE-R ODD after restarting device
	Power On to IDE-R CDROM	Enter IDE-R ODD after powering on device
	Sleep - Light (G1/S2) Enter sleep mode (G1/S2)
	Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	Restart device after forcing device to power off.
	Diagnostic Interrupt (NMI)	Print error report and restarting device
	Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS
	Power Off - Hard Graceful (G3)	Normal shut down via the hardware
	Master Bus Reset Graceful	Normal shut down and resetting the hardware
	Power Cycle (Graceful Soft Off) (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS then restarting the device
	Power Cycle (Graceful Hard Off) (G3)	Normal shut down via the hardware then restarting the device

* These Action Categories are only supported on motherboards which support remote management controllers.

vPro

Action type	Action options Description
Power Control	Power On (G0/S0) Power on device
	Power Cycle - Soft off (G2/S5)	Restart device after shutting down the OS
	Master Bus Reset Reset the hardware
	Sleep - Deep (G1/S3) Enter sleep mode (G1/S3)
	Hibernate (G1/S4) Enter hibernate mode (G1/S4)
	Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off device
	Power Off - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)	Normal shut down via the OS
	Master Bus Reset Graceful	Normal shut down and resetting the hardware
	Restart Computer to BIOS	Enter BIOS after restarting device
	Power On to BIOS Enter BIOS after powering on device
	Restart Computer to IDE-R Floppy	Enter IDE-R floppy drive after restarting device
	Power On to IDE-R Floppy	Enter IDE-R floppy drive after powering on device
	Restart Computer to IDE-R CDROM	Enter IDE-R ODD after restarting device
	Power On to IDE-R CDROM	Enter IDE-R ODD after powering on device

* These Action Categories are only supported on motherboards which support remote management controllers.

BMC

Action type	Action options Description
Power Control	Power On (G0/S0) Power on device
	Power Off - Soft (G2/S5)	Power off device
	Power Off - Hard (G2/S5)	Force device to power off
	Power Cycle - Soft Graceful (G2/S5)	Restart device after shutting down the OS.
	Power Cycle - Hard Off (G3)	Restart device after forcing device to power off.

* These Action Categories are only supported on motherboards which support remote management controllers.

1. Enter the Delay Time (in minutes). The delay time determines the amount of time this task should wait before executing this task once the previous task has finished.

When scheduling multiple tasks, ensure that each task has a delay time set to ensure the tasks are executed properly.

Add Task Action Type Power Control Delay Time 0 Minute The time that the task execution is delayed. Power Action Power Off Power On Power Reboot Cancel Save

1. Click on Save to save this task

Add Task Action Type Power Control Delay Time 0 Minute The time that the task execution is delayed. Power Action ● Power Off ● Power On ● Power Reboot × Cancel Save

1. Repeat steps 7 to 10 to add more tasks, the tasks added will appear in the List of Tasks.

To delete a task, click on the X next to the task in the List of Tasks.

1. Once you have finished, click on Add to add the new scheduled task to the task scheduler calendar.

Taskset Editor Host Name | IP Address | OS Information | Model Name | DESKTOP-WUSGNEE | 152.168.0.16 | Windows | Pu WSJ070-ACE | Taskset Information Taskset Name: Task 1 Start Date & Time: 2019 09 08 - 15:00 End Date & Time: 2019 09 29 - 00:00 Repetition Schedule: Repeat Daily Weekly Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Power Action Power Off 8 mins Add Task Add

5.10.3 Editing a task

1. Click on the scheduled task you would like to edit on the task scheduler calendar.
2. You can edit the Start Date & Time, End Date & Time, Repetition Schedule, Activation, and List of tasks.

To delete a task, click on the X next to the task in the List of Tasks.

1. Once you have finished editing the scheduled task, click on Update.

Taskset Editor Host Name IP Address OS Information.Model Name DESKTOP-00FTS5 192.164.0.13 Windows VOS CT DESKTOP-127H8W 192.165.0.14 Windows VOS CT Task Scheduler Taskset Name: Reboot Start Date & Time: 2019 09 13 - 00:00 End Date & Time: 2019 09 18 - 00:00 Repetition Schedule: Repeat Daily Weekly Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Power Action Power Reboot 4 mins % Add Task Update Delete

5.10.4 Deleting a task

1. Click on the scheduled task you would like to delete on the task scheduler calendar.
2. Click on Delete to delete the scheduled task.

Taskset Editor Host Name: IP Address OS Information Model Name DESKTOP-1827585 Windows VOIS-C1 DESKTOP-727480M Windows VOIS-C1 Task Scheduler Taskset Name: Reboot Start Date & Time: 2019 09 13 - 00:00 End Date & Time: 2019 09 18 - 00:00 Repetition Schedule: Repeat Daily Weekly Activation: Enabled Task Schedule List of Tasks: Power Action Power Reboot 6 mins Add Task Update Delete

5.11 Screen Broadcast

• This item is not supported if the main server is running on Linux.
• This item is only supported on Windows-based client devices.

Screen broadcast allows either one-to-one or one-to-many access to the client device's screen, video camera devices, and broadcast a selected clip, and also allow you to select the resolution, video quality, and audio quality of the broadcasted video or clip.

To use the Screen Broadcast function, select the device(s) you would like to create a broadcast room with on the main menu page and select Screen Broadcast > Create a broadcast room from the Select Function drop down menu. If a broadcast room has already been created, select Screen Broadcast > the created broadcast room, from the Select Function drop down menu.

Broadcast Preview Cableon Recoveries Transfers Video Speed Multi Health ASLS 10:08 USB x 10KB 30 412.5GHz/160V Memory 8792 MHz/DCR4 (255MHz) DRAM Status TOMATO, Corex 8792/DCR4 (255MHz) TOMATO, Corex 8792 TOMATO, Corex 8792 D.O.C.P. Disasht FAN Profile CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FAN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FINF CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/FIN CPU/METAFS110000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

Broadcast Room Overview

Broadcast Preview Código Revise Size Frequencies Video Speed Data Health AVG 420V 10:08 CPU Temperature 50°C CPU Core Voltage 1.449 V Motherboard Temperature 36°C DHAM Status DHAM.C1: Cortex 8792MΩ 2132MΩ DHAM.42 MΩ DHAM.37 MΩ DHAM.62 MΩ Storage Information AHG: SATELC 2: INTEL SSNCC2MH1.20HG (126.9GHz) D.D.C.P. Disabled Disabled FAN Profile CPU.FAN CPU.GPT.TAN CPU.OPT.TAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU.FAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN CPU .FAN TAN

Room Name	Enter the name of the broadcast room
Broadcast Source	Select the device to be the broadcast source
Input Type	Select if you would like to broadcast the broadcast source's display device, camera device, or a video file on the selected device.
Broadcast Target	Select the targets you would like to broadcast to.
Play/Stop	Play or stop the broadcast.
Muted	Mute or unmute the broadcast sound for broadcast target(s) when broadcasting.
Display Zoom	Select the screen size of the broadcast.
Quality	Select the resolution of the broadcast.
Create/Apply	Create the broadcast room, or apply changes to an existing broadcast room.

• The main server will be marked in the Broadcast Source. Video files can only be broadcast when the main server is selected as the broadcast source. You can broadcast Display Device and Camera Device from any broadcast source.
• The resolution may differ according to the Input Type selected and the resolutions it supports.

5.11.1 Setting up the broadcast environment

Before using the Screen Broadcast function, please set up the main server's playback environment for the broadcast function. Please refer to the following steps or click on ? at the bottom left of the Broadcast Room for information on setting up the Broadcast function playback environment settings.

Broadcast Target IP Address | Resolution | Quality | Zoom | Alias | Login User | 192.168.0.21 1024 X 768 Auto Screen Size IT server... Administrator 192.168.1.105 1366 X 768 Auto Screen Size IT server... DASH 192.168.0.17 1920 X 1080 Auto Screen Size IT server... Administrator ? Play Muted Display Zoom Quality Apply

1. Navigate to https://github.com/GyanD/codexFFmpeg/releases, then scroll down to ffmpeg version 5.1.2, 5.0.1, or 4.4.

Only ffmpeg versions 4.4, 5.0.1, or 5.1.2 or supported.

ffmpeg 5.1.2 builds Source: ffmpeg/FFmpeg@ .excfsbae6 Assets 10 1 1 4 15 people reacted

1. Select and download the ffmpeg-build-shared.7z file.

ffmpeg 5.1.2 builds GuanD released this Sep 26, 2022 5.1.2 6472e72 Source: ffmpeg/ffmpeg/zz build3a4d9 Assets #ffmpeg-5.1.2 Essentials, build7z 24 MB Sep 26, 2022 #ffmpeg-5.1.2 Essentials, build.zip 79 MB Sep 26, 2022 #ffmpeg-5.1.2-full, build-shared7z 37.8 MB Sep 26, 2022 #ffmpeg-5.1.2-full, build-shared.zip 55.2 MB Sep 26, 2022

1. After the download is completed, move the downloaded ffmpeg installation zip file into the same folder as the ffmpeg environment variables file (BroadcastEnvInstall.exe) located in the ASUS Control Center Express\Thirdparty installation folder.

This PC > OS (C:) > Program Files (x86) > ASUS > ASUS Control Center Express > Thirdparty Quick access OneDrive This PC 3D Objects Desktop Documents Downloads Music Pictures Videos OS (C:) USB Drive (E) BroadcastEnvInstallLexe 15.2.0 6/29/2021 11:57 AM ffmpeg-4.4-full_build-shared.7z WinRAR 层缩模 33.2 MB

• The default installation path for ASUS Control Center Express is ASUS Control Center Express\Thirdparty, if you selected a different path when installing ASUS Control Center Express, ensure to change the installation folder path accordingly.

• You may change the folder path for the downloaded ffmpeg installation zip file and ffmpeg environment variables file (BroadcastEnvInstall.exe) if required, however, both files need to be located in the same folder.

• Launch BroadcastEnvInstall.exe to set the ffmpeg environmental variable settings, then press any key to exit once the settings have been set.

Ensure both downloaded ffmpeg installation zip file and ffmpeg environment variables file (BroadcastEnvInstall.exe) are located in the same folder before setting the ffmpeg environment variables.

Run start install
start unzip
finish unzip
installation succeeded
Press any key to continue . . . 

5.11.2 Adding a new Broadcast Room

To use the broadcast function, you will need to create a broadcast room. On the Broadcast Room page, you can configure different settings for the broadcast, such as the selecting the webcam or a video as the broadcast source, or selecting the broadcast target.

1. Select the device(s) you would like to create a broadcast room with on the main menu page and select Screen Broadcast > Create a broadcast room from the Select Function drop down menu.
2. Enter the broadcast room name into the Room Name field.
3. Select the broadcast source from the broadcast source list.
4. Click on Edit next to Input Type to configure the Device settings.

Broadcast Room Room Name Broadcast Source IP Address | Alias | Login User | Connection 127.0.0.1 - Console LAPTOP-CSIQI37E admin Online Device Settings Edit Input Type | Max Resolution | Stream Display Device 1920 X 1080 Video

1. Select the Input Type in the Device Settings window. Depending on the input type selected, the configuration options for Device Settings may differ.

Device Settings Input Type Display Device Max Resolution 1920 X 1080 Audio Output YES OK Cancel

- Display Device

Set the display device of the broadcast source device for the broadcast.

Device Settings Input Type Display Device Max Resolution 1920 X 1080 Audio Output YES OK Cancel

Max Resolution	The maximum resolution of the display device.
Audio Output	Select whether to enable or disable audio output for the broadcast.

- Camera Device

Set the camera device of the broadcast source device for the broadcast.

Device Settings Input Type Camera Device Device Model USB2.0 VGA UVC WebCam Max Resolution 640 X 480 Audio Output YES Audio Device Microphone (Realtek High Definition) FPS 30 OK Cancel

Device Model	Select the camera to be used for the broadcast.
Max Resolution	The maximum resolution of the camera.
Audio Output	Select whether to enable or disable audio output for the broadcast.
Audio Device	Select the audio device for the broadcast.
FPS	Select the camera's frames per second (FPS).

The Max Resolution options may differ depending on the resolutions the camera supports. The FPS will be adjusted according to the resolution selected.

- Video File

Select a video file on the broadcast source device for the broadcast.

Device Settings Input Type Video File Video File C:\Users\Administrator\Desktop Max Resolution 1920 X 1080 Play time Range Infinite loop OK Cancel

Video File	Select the video file to be used for the broadcast. Supported video codec formats: MPEG-2, MPEG-4, .AVI, and .WMV.
Max Resolution	The maximum resolution of the video broadcast.
Play time	Select the number of times the video file is looped from either a set range, or a custom number.
	Select the number of times to loop, or enter the number manually.

• The main server will be marked in the Broadcast Source. Video files can only be broadcast when the main server is selected as the broadcast source.

• To select multiple video files and create a playlist, click Edit next to Device Settings again and select the next video file.

• To change any configuration options, click again.

Edit next to Device Settings

1. Check the client devices you would like to broadcast to.

Broadcast Target IP Address | Resolution | Quality | Zoom | Volume output | ASAs | Lo 192.168.0.17 1920 X 1080 Auto Screen Size Normal volume DESKTO... Muted Display Zoom Quality Create

1. Configure the Display Zoom, Quality, and whether the audio should be muted for the broadcast

Broadcast Target IP Address | Resolution | Quality | Zoom | Volume output | Alias | Lo 192.168.0.17 1920 X 1080 Auto Screen Size Normal volume DESKTO... At Muted Display Zoom Quality Create

1. Click Create to create the broadcast room.

Broadcast Target IP Address | Resolution | Quality | Zoom | Volume output | Alias | Lo 192.168.0.17 1920 X 1080 Auto Screen Size Normal volume DESKTO... At ? Mutod Display Zoom Quality Create

5.11.3 Managing video playlists

When a video file is added, the playlist editor will automatically appear and can be used to view or change the order in which video files are played.

• To change the position of a video file in the playlist, click and drag the title of the video file to change its position in the playlist.
• To select which video file is played first in the broadcast, click the title of the video file. It will be highlighted and played first when the broadcast is started.
• Once a video file is added, click the icon to view information about a video file in the playlist, or click on the icon to delete a video from the playlist.

Video Edit PlayList 1.4 new Function Introduction-Central control functions - Title.mpl 1.4 new Function Introduction-Device Grouping-Title.mpl 1.4 new Function Introduction-Software Role Management.mpl

If the broadcast is currently active, the playlist viewer will appear instead. The currently playing video will be highlighted with a blue frame and arrow icon. To make changes to the playlist, please stop the broadcast first.

Video Running PlayList 1 / ∞ 1.4 new function introductions-Central control functions + Title.mp4 1.4 new function introductions-Device Grouping+Title.mp4 1.4 new function introductions-Software Rule Management.mp4

5.11.4 Starting or stopping a broadcast

You can start or stop the broadcast of an existing broadcast room by following the below steps:

1. Navigate to the Broadcast Room of an existing broadcast room.
2. Scroll to the bottom of the page, then click on Play.
3. You can view the data transmission rate and health status of the broadcast in the Broadcast Source block.
4. You can configure or view the settings of the broadcast from the items located at the bottom of the Broadcast Preview.

Broadcast Preview CODI: 2013.4/2018 Reversals: 1920 x 5000 Forward: 36 Video Speed: 470 MHz/5000 Data Quality: 9999.915 MB (2014 2113 MHz) CPU Temperature CPU Core Voltage 1.449 V Motherboard Temperature 36°C DRAM Status DREAM_ET / Crop#: 811CME F133dB+ DREAM_ET / N/A DREAM_ET / N/A DREAM_ET / N/A DCLE P. Disabling - Break List FAN Profile CPU PAN N/A CHAT PAN 2705 RPM CHAT PAN N/A POY PAN 2126 RPM CPU OPT PAN N/A CHAT PAN N/A CHAT PAN N/A SAND RAINP N/A CPU PAN QFan Control CPU Core Voltage 1.449 V Matherboard Temperature 36°C Storage Information ADC2 DATA: 3, INTEL: 880628PM7.2CMV (123.9MB) EZ System Tuning Check the next button to apply a pre-configured profile for improved power performance in energy savings. Normal Boot Priority Disputes and drag the items. Switch all Windows Core Manager Settings, 8.10x70s SODC2 SWITCHERS (1.00 GB) Boot Menu(FB) Video status Quality 100%y > LIVE Source: XLS Save & Print(P)... Recoverable Model(F) - ? Search/FPS 50°C Next Home (F)

Play / Stop	Play or stop the broadcast.
Volume	Adjust the volume of the preview broadcast of the main server.* This option only affects the volume of the broadcast source, and will not adjust the volume for client devices.
Video Status	Displays the current status of the broadcast.
Settings	Allows you to toggle theVideo statuson/off, and also select the quality of the broadcast.
Picture-in-Picture	Select if you would like to view the preview broadcast in Picture-in-Picture (PiP).
Full Screen	Select if you would like to view the preview broadcast in full screen.

5. Press Stop to end the ongoing broadcast.

• You can configure the settings for the Broadcast Room when a broadcast is playing. Please refer to 5.10.4 Editing an existing Broadcast Room for more information.
• Clicking on next to the Broadcast Room Name will delete the Broadcast Room if you no longer need the Broadcast Room.
• You cannot broadcast to client devices which are offline, if a selected device is offline whilst the broadcast is playing, the broadcast will automatically play when the device changes to online status.
• Client device(s) cannot update agents during a broadcast. Stop and close the broadcast first if you wish to update the agents for the device(s).
• A device selected as broadcast target can be set as the broadcast source if the Input Type selected is Display Device or Camera Device.

5.11.5 Editing an existing Broadcast Room

1. (optional) If you wish to add new device(s) to the existing broadcast room, select the new client device(s) you would like to add to the broadcast room before continuing with step 2.
2. From the Select Function drop down menu, select Screen Broadcast, then select the Broadcast Room you would like to edit.
3. Follow steps 2-8 of section the Broadcast Room. 5.10.2 Adding a new Broadcast Room to edit

If you added new device(s) to the broadcast room, ensure to select the newly added device(s) in the Broadcast Target block.

4. Click Apply once you are finished to apply the changes made, or click Play to play the broadcast using the new changes.

Clicking on next to the Broadcast Room Name will delete the Broadcast Room if you no longer need the Broadcast Room.

Chapter 6

This chapter describes the User and ASUS Control Center Express settings.

6.1 Options menu

To access Options, click on 📋 at the top right menu bar, then select Options.

6.1.1 SMTP settings

Set up the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) for ASUS Control Center Express to allow feedback on system failures and alerts to be sent via email to the system administrator.

The settings entered may vary depending on the service provider, please refer to the information provided by your service provider.

1. Fill in and check the required fields.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Display Name ACCE SMTP SMTP Server smtp.sendgrid.net SMTP Port 587 Sender Address [e-mail] Sender Password The sender's password Enable SSL Yes, I want to enable SSL Send Test Mail Save

Display Name	The name of this SMTP setting. The display name will not appear on sent emails
SMTP Server	The SMTP server responsible for collecting and sending emails
SMTP Port	Service port for SMTP. Common ports used are 25 (SMTP former default port), 465 (encrypted SMTP), and 587 (new SMTP default)
Sender Address	The email of the ACCE notification sender. This email address must exist within the SMTP Server service* Certain mail servers may require two-factor authentication. Refer to the documentation included with the mail server for more information.
Sender Password	The password for the ACCE notification email sender
Enable SSL	Enables mail sent or forwarded through this SMTP server to be SSL encrypted

1. (optional) Click on Send Test Mail, then enter an email and click Send to receive the test mail allowing you to check the status of the SMTP. If the SMTP is functioning properly, you should receive an email.

2. Click Save to save the changes made.

6.1.2 Client rule management

This item allows you to add or delete rules which send notifications when the status of a sensor changes.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Free-up System Space Client Rule MainServer Rule Rule List Active Rule | Rule Name | Front Log | Administrator Email List | Edit Rule | Delete Rule |

Next Instructions ✓ [e-mail] ✓ 3

Target Host List Host Name | IP | OS Type | ALL ALL ALL Monitor Connection List Type | Online | Offline | Connection: Monitor Hardware Sensor List type | Normal | Warning | Critical | Fan 0 ▲ ▲ Voltage ● ▲ ▲ Temperature 0 ▲ ▲

Adding a new notification rule

1. Click on Add.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Free-up System Space Cloud Rule MultiServer Rule Rule List Action Rule | Rule Name | Event Log | Administrator Email List | Edit Rule | Delete Rule | Next Modification @ admin1000.com

2. Enter a rule name, then select the devices to apply the rule to. Click Next.

• You may use the Search box to search and filter devices according to the keywords you enter. Click Clear to clear any search filters applied.
• Selecting a group in the Group option will check the devices in that group on the Host List.
• To view more column items in the Host List, click on Options, then check the metadata item you wish to display and click on Save.
• Check Apply rules to all machines (including newly deployed machines to apply the new rule to all devices in the Host List

Add Rule Step 1: Assign the rule name and select the hosts. Rule Name Press Enter to search Clear Options ■ Apply rules to all machines ( including newly deployed machines ) Group Host List Host Name OS information IP Address DESKTOP-2H09F59 Win10(64) 192.168.0.2 DESKTOP-71F49BA Win10(64) 192.168.0.20 DESKTOP-2H09F59 Win10(64) 192.168.0.3 DESKTOP-5736306 Win10(64) 192.168.0.4 DESKTOP-8D28CFC Win10(64) 192.168.0.5 DESKTOP-AA001A7 Win10(64) 192.168.0.191 DESKTOP-0936C7B Win10(64) 192.168.0.106 DESKTOP-E8E2AJ6 Win10(64) 192.168.0.79 DESKTOP-2H09F59 Win 168.0 192.168.0.407 Next

3. Enable one or more rule triggers, then click Next.

A notification will be sent when a sensor changes from any status to the selected status. For example, checking Normal will send notifications when the status changes from Warning or Critical to Normal.

Add Rule Step 2: Select the hardware sensor or utilization type and status. ■ Connection ✓ Online ■ Offline ■ Hardware Sensor Type Normal Wamping Critical ■ Fan ■ ■ ■ ■ Voltage ■ ■ ■ ■ Temperature ■ ■ ■ ■ S.M.A.R.T. ■ ■ ■ ■ Utilization Type Normal Wamping Critical ■ CPU ■ ■ ■ ■ DIMM ■ ■ ■ ■ Partition ■ ■ ■ ■ Network ■ ■ ■ ■ Management Controller ■ vPro ■ DASH ■ BMC Previous Nexi

4. Enable or disable the newly added rule by checking Active Rule.

Add Rule Select 3: Select at least one notification method. Active Rule Event Log Email EX [e-mail] [e-mail], Previous Save

1. Select the notification method between the following options (multiple notification methods may be selected):

- Event Log

The notification will be displayed on the device's event log and system overview.

Add Rule Select 3: Select at least one notification method. Active Rule Event Log Email EX [e-mail] [e-mail] Previous Save

- Email

The notification is sent to the entered email addresses.

Ensure to set up the SMTP server settings before using the email function. For more information please refer to the SMTP Settings section in this chapter.

When entering multiple emails, press after each email to separate the emails.

Add Rule Select 3: Select at least one notification method. Active Rule Event Log Email [e-mail] EX: www.asur.com/[e-mail] Previous Save

1. Click on Save after finished selecting your notification method(s).

Add Rule Select 3: Select at least one notification method. Active Rule Event Log Email [e-mail] [e-mail][e-mail]; Previous Save

Editing a notification rule

Use the edit function to add new devices or devices which have been re-deployed to the notification rule.

1. Select a rule in the Rule column.

Rule List you wish to edit, then click on √ in the Edit

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Rule List Add Active Rule Rule Name Event Log Administrator Email List Edit Rule Delete Rule 0 Server Monitor [e-mail] Notification [e-mail] Monitor Hardware Sensor List Host Name IP OS type DESKTOP-824USS 192.168(0.18) Win30(54) DESKTOP-SG51DOP 192.168(0.13) Win30(54) Monitor Hardware Sensor List Type Normal Warning Critical Fan Voltage Temperature SMART Consolidation

1. Follow steps 2 to 5 edit your Rule, then click made.

Save to save the changes

Deleting a notification rule

1. Select a rule in the Rule List you wish to delete, then click on 📄 in the Delete Rule column.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Rule List Add Active Rule Rule Name Event Log Administrator Email List Edit Rule Counter Rule IT Server Monitor [e-mail] Notification [e-mail]

1. Click Delete to delete the rule.

Delete Rule Are you sure you would like to delete this rule? [Notification] Cancel Delete

6.1.3 Main server rule management

This item allows you to enable or disable notifications when users log in.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Client Rule MultiServer Rule User Login Notification Save Event Log Email ADTV120202021 ADTV120202021 LIC [e-mail]

Event Log	Enable/disable logging of user login events to the event log.
Email	Enter one or more email addresses to receive user login notifications.* Ensure that the SMTP server is configured before using this option.** To add additional email addresses, pressafter entering an email address.
Save	Save changes to the main server rules.

6.1.4 General configuration

The General configurations allows you to configure different settings for the Main Server and agents. Scroll down to view more options.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License MainServer Settings Save Theme dark Web page refresh timer 10 secconds Check for updates timer 10 hours MC response timer 60 secconds Report Generator Save Connection report Agent configurations list Save

MainServer Settings:

Configure items for the main ASUS Control Center Express server. Click on Save to save the changes made.

MainServer Settings Save Theme dark Web page refresh timer 10 Seconds MC response timer 60 Seconds Mission center process limit 10 Processes Diskless mode

Theme	Select a color theme (acc_csm, acc, dark, metal) for your main server.
Web page refresh timer	Set the time interval in seconds between each refresh of all webpages of the main server.
Mission center process limit	Set the maximum number of mission center processes.
Diskless mode	Enable to allow diskless mode, which allows you to deploy agents to remote machines without storage devices.

Report Generator:

Allows you to enable or disable recording for Connection reports. Click on Save to save the changes made.

Report Generator Save Connection report

Connection report

Enable or disable recording for connection reports.

Agent configuration list:

Configure the agent sensor intervals and response times. Click on Save to save the changes made.

Agent configurations list Hardware sensor interval 10 seconds Utilization time interval 10 seconds Agent response timer 20 seconds

Hardware sensor interval	Set the time interval in seconds for the hardware sensor to return sensor values.
Utilization time interval	Set the time interval in seconds for the utilization sensor to return sensor values.
Agent response timer	Set the time interval in seconds for the agent to query tasks from the main server.

Agent device's administrator account:

Set the default administrator account and password for client devices if no administrator account and password were entered when deploying agents. Click on Save to save the changes made.

Agent Device's Administrator Account Windows Account Windows Account Windows Password Linux Account Linux Password Administrator ...... admin ......

Windows account	Set the default administrator account for Windows.
Windows password	Set the default administrator password for Windows.
Linux account	Set the default administrator account for Linux.
Linux password	Set the default administrator password for Linux.

• If the account type is a domain account, you may enter the account in the format Domain\Account, which will set the default account used when deploying to a domain account.
• When using the default account when deploying, make sure of the language of the client device. The system account with administrator privileges may differ according to the system language, and may affect agent deployment to that device.

vPro Account:

Set the default login account used to log into the client vPro remote management controller. Click on Save to save the changes made.

vPro Account Account admin Password ****

Account	Set the default account to log into the client device's vPro remote management controller.
Password	Set the default password to log into the client device's vPro remote management controller.

The account and password entered should match the account and password for the client device's vPro remote management controller.

DASH Account:

Set the default login account used to log into the client DASH remote management controller. Click on Save to save the changes made.

DASH Account Save Account Administrator Password ****** DASH Port 664 TLS

Account	Set the default account to log into the client device's DASH remote management controller.
Password	Set the default password to log into the client device's DASH remote management controller.
DASH port	Set the port for DASH (default: 664).
TLS	Enable or disable TLS (Transport Layer Security).

The account and password entered should match the account and password for the client device's DASH remote management controller.

BMC Account:

Set the default login account used to log into the client BMC remote management controller. Click on Save to save the changes made.

BMC Account Save Account admin Password .... Management Port <43

Account	Set the default account to log into the client device’s BMC remote management controller.
Password	Set the default password to log into the client device’s BMC remote management controller.
Management Port	Set the port for BMC (default: 443).

The account and password entered should match the account and password for the client device's BMC remote management controller.

Agent port:

Configure the ports for the agent and main server to use when connecting to the client device. Click on Save to save the changes made.

We recommend using the default values as this will require no further adjustments to the client device's firewall settings.

Agent port HTTPS 10636 Remote Desktop port 10537 Undeploy port 10638 Save

HTTPS	Set the port for webpage access. Default is 10636.
Remote Desktop port	Set the port for remote desktop. Default is 10637.
Undeploy port	Set the port for removing the agent from clients. Default is 10638.

Appearance Configuration:

View the version of the main server, as well as customize the banner logo. Click on Save to save the changes made, or click on Reset to return to the default banner logo.

Appearance Configuration Save Reset Software version 1.5.4 Choose file Browse Banner logo ASUS Debug mode

Software version	Displays the version of the main ASUS Control Center Express server.
Banner Logo	Click Browse to select and upload a new banner logo. The banner logo can be viewed in the top left corner of the main dashboard overview.
Debug mode	Enable or disable debug mode.

Update Settings:

Configure the update settings for the main server and clients.

Update Settings Immediate update Automatic updates 12 Hours Mailbox notification 1 Hour Update all clients Check Update

Immediate update	Click Check to check for and download new updates for the ASUS Control Center Express main software.
Automatic updates	Enable this option to automatically check for ASUS Control Center Express updates and send update notifications.
Mailbox notification	Set the notification and update time for ASUS Control Center Express mailbox.
Update All Clients	Click Update to begin updating all client agents

• Automatic updates is set to Disable by default.
- Mailbox notification is enabled by default.

Installer Settings:

Configure the Installer settings. Click on Save to save the changes made.

Installer Settings Installer update period 1 Hours Save Download path C:\Program Files (x86)\ASUS\ASUS Control Center Express\apro_conscis\installer Edit

Installer Update Period	Set how often the installer will check for new updates.
Download path	View the current download path.
Edit	Select a new download path.

Remote Machines Discovery:

Enable Search and import to search for deployed devices that have not yet been added to the Device List. If there are devices that were not successfully added, check if sufficient licenses are available and click Retry to try again.

- Disable Search and Import after you finish, as it may interfere with agent management.

- Ensure that the default administrator account and password for client devices is correct, or Linux client devices may fail to be added. Refer to Options > General Configuration > Agent Device's Administrator Account for more information.

Remote Machines Discovery Search and import List of machines that need to be retried IP Address | Message | No Rows To Show Retry

Log Level:

Log level Console Log Level Error

Console log level

Set the log level of the console to Info, Warning, or Error.

6.1.5 License

You may add or remove license keys in this menu. You may also import license information from previous versions of ACC.

Every client device you wish to deploy an agent to requires a corresponding license key.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (1 / 10) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount Device License Key Information SMTPSCTS 50 CSM License Information (0 / 1) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount SMTPSCTS 1

To add a single license key

1. Locate the License Key on the ASUS Control Center Express card bundled in your motherboard's giftbox.

2. Click on Add Key.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (1 / 10) Export Import Add Key Distance Source Key Total Amount Device Address Key Information FASTENDS 60 3

1. Key in the license key and then click on Add Key to register a license for a single device on ASUS Control Center Express.

Add License Key XXXXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXXX Add Key

To import multiple license keys

1. Clickon Export to export a template .csv file, then enter the required information in the .csv file.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (1 / 10) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount Device Universe Key Information RSPSOS 10 O

2.Clickon Import to import your edited .csv file.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (1 / 10) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount Device License Key Information FAVSECTOR 10 0

To add an ACC CSM license key

If you wish to deploy to a CSM client device, please enter the 18 character CSM license key in the CSM License Information block to activate the CSM client device. You can also use the Setting Migrator to migrate the CSM license keys from ACC CSM to ASUS Control Center Express. For more information on the Settings Migrator, please refer to Chapter 6 Settings Migrator.

Every CSM client device you wish to deploy an agent to requires a corresponding CSM license key.

Migrated CSM product license keys will be migrated to the CSM License Information list.

1. Prepare your ACC CSM license key(s).
2. Click on Add Key.

CSM License Information (0 / 0) Export Import Add Key Remove Gross Set Total Amount

1. Key in the license key and then click on Add Key to register a license for a single device on ASUS Control Center Express.

Add CSM License Key XXXXXXXX-XXXXXXXX-XXXXXX Add Key

To import multiple ACC CSM license keys

1. Clickon Export to export a template .csv file, then enter the required information in the .csv file.

CSM License Information (0 / 0) Export Import Add Key Remove Show Key Tool Answer Allowed Use in the

2.Clickon Import to import your edited .csv file.

CSM License Information (0 / 0) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Tool Amount

To remove a license key

1. Select the license key(s) or ACC CSM license key(s) you would like to remove, then click Remove.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License License Information (1 / 11) Export Import Add Key Remove License Key Total Amount Device License Key Information PART NUMBER: 18 C PROCUM: 1 CSM License Information (0 / 1) License Key Total Amount Export Import Add Key Remove

6.1.6 Free up system space

This item allows you to free up system space by deleting Event Log and Mission Center entries.

Options SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Free-up System Space Date 2023/07/01 - 2023/11/09 Event Log All Connection Online Offline Hardware Sensor Type Normal Warning Critical Fan Voltage Temperature S.M.A.R.T. Utilization Type Normal Warning Critical

To delete entries from the Event Log or Mission Center

1. Select a date range to delete all entries between the specified dates, or leave blank to delete all entries regardless of date.
2. In the Event Log or Mission Center panels, select one or more options to delete all entries matching the selected options, or select All to delete entries of all types.
3. Click Delete to delete all entries matching the selected date and type filters.

SMTP Settings Rule Management General Configuration License Free-up System Space Date 2023/07/01 - 2023/11/09 Event Log All Connection Online Offline Hardware Sensor Type Normal Warning Critical Fan ✓ ✓ ✓ Voltage ✓ ✓ ✓ Temperature ✓ ✓ ✓ S.M.A.R.T. ✓ ✓ ✓ Utilization Type Normal Warning Critical CPU ✓ ✓ ✓ DIMM ✓ ✓ ✓ Partition ✓ ✓ ✓ Network ✓ ✓ ✓

1. Enable or disable (optional). Backup to save a backup of the entries before deletion
2. Click YES to confirm deletion.

Delete Event Log This operation will delete the selected event log. It is recommended to check the backup box to back up the data before deleting. Are you sure you want to delete it? Type Status Connection Online Offline Management Controller vPro DASH BMC Fan Normal Warning Critical Voltage Normal Warning Critical Temperature Normal Warning Critical S.M.A.R.T. Normal Warning Critical CPU Normal Warning Critical DIMM Normal Warning Critical Partition Normal Warning Critical Network Normal Warning Critical Console System All Backup YES Cancel

6.2 Account menu

The Account menu allows you to manage accounts for ASUS Control Center Express. To access the Account Menu, click on 8 located at the top right menu bar, then select Settings.

The information entered in this section is for reference only.

6.2.1 Account Settings

Account settings displays all user accounts on ASUS Control Center Express, and allows you to add, edit, or delete user accounts.

Account Account Delete Add Username Role Name Active Email Description Administrator adminizacnfa SF Role Privilege Management Delete Add Role Name Applied Count Description Employees UI No management privileges

- The default account and password for ASUS Control Center Express is administrator and admin respectively.

- Change the default account and password of ASUS Control Center Express to ensure better security.

To add an account

1. Click on Add.

Account Account Delete Add Username Rust Name Action final Description administrator administrator if

1. Enter the required information into the fields, and check Enable the account in the Active field to enable this account, then click on Save to add this new account.

Add New Account Username MIS User1 Password .......... Confirm Password .......... Email [e-mail] Role Name administrator Description About this account... Active Enable the account Cancel Save

Username	Username of the account.
Password	Password for the account.
Confirm Password	Confirm the password for the account.
Email	Email associated with the account.
Role Name	The role assigned to the account will determine what privileges it has. You can select to use the preset administrator or viewer roles or add new roles.* To add or modify roles, refer to the Role Privilege Management section in this chapter.
Description	Enter a brief description of the account.
Active	Check to enable the account.

To edit an account

1. Click on the account you wish to modify.

Account Account Username Role Name Action Email Description administrator x200-0032019 MS User1 admin:express MS@[e-mail]

1. You may edit the account details, click on Update once you are finished.

Edit Account Username MIS User1 New password e.g. ****** Confirm Password e.g. ****** Email [e-mail] Role Name administrator Description About this account Active Enable the account Cancel Update

To delete an account

1. Select the account(s) you wish to delete, then click Delete.

The administrator account for ASUS Control Center Express cannot be deleted.

Account Delete Add Username Role Name Active Print Description administrator administrator MS User1 administrator [e-mail]

1. Confirm that you wish to delete the account(s), then click Delete.

Delete Account Are you sure that you want to delete this account? [ MIS User1 ] Cancel Delete

6.2.2 Role privilege management

The Role Privilege Management displays all roles on ASUS Control Center Express, and allows you to add, edit, or modify permissions of different roles that you may assign to users.

To add a new role

1. Click on Add.

Role Privilege Management Delete Add Role Name Applied Count Description administrator 78 viewer 30

2. Enter the Role Name and Description for the role, then check the privileges you want to assign to this role in the Privilege Configuration block.

Check the Select All option to select all privileges; clicking on this option again will deselect all privileges.

Account / Role Privilege Role Name Manager Description Manager account privileges Privilege Configuration Select All Macdata Edit Columns View Metadata Management Deployment Management Display Assets View Agent Management Options SMTP Settings Edit SMTP View SMTP Role Management Edit Role View Role Management General Configuration Edit General Configuration View General Configuration License Management Edit License

3. Click Add to add the new role.

Account / Role Privilege Role Name Manager Description Manager account privileges Privilege Configuration Select Assist Metadata Edit Columns View Metadata Management Deployment Management Display Agents View Agent Management Options SMTP Settings Edit SMTP View SMTP Rule Management Edit Rule View Rule Management General Configuration Edit General Configuration View General Configuration License Management Edit License

To edit a role

1. Click on the role you wish to edit.

Role Privilege Management Delete Add Role Name Applied Count Description administrator 78 street 39 Manager 19 Manage account privileges Employee 7 No management privileges

2. You may edit the Role Name and Description, or modify the Privilege Configuration. Click on Update once you are finished.

Account / Role Privilege Role Name Manager Description Manager account privileges Privilege Configuration Update Select All Metadata Edit Columns View Metadata Management Deployment Management Deploy Agents View Agent Management Options SMTP Settings Edit SMTP View SMTP Rule Management Edit Rate View Rule Management

To delete a role

1. Select the role(s) you wish to delete, then click Delete.

Role Privilege Management Delete Add Role Name Applied Count Description administrator 75 view 39 Manager 19 Manager account privileges Employees ? No management privileges

1. Confirm that you wish to delete the account(s), then click Delete.

The preset roles cannot be deleted.

If there are accounts associated with the role(s) you wish to delete, the accounts will also be deleted when you delete the role(s). The pop up message will notify you of the amount of accounts affected by this action.

Delete the Role Are you sure you want to delete this role? [ Manager ] It'll delete all the member of this role. Amount of accounts affected: 1 Cancel Delete

6.2.3 Login user

This item allows you to view which users are currently logged in.

To force a user to log out

Select one or more users, then click Logout User.

Login User Username IP Login Time administrator 127.0.0.1 2024-09-04 08:57:59 Log out users

6.3 Backup and restore

You can backup or restore the data and settings of your ASUS Control Center Express main server. Please follow the instructions for the type of database (MySQL or SQLite) selected during installation of ASUS Control Center Express.

• Ensure that your data and settings are backed up on a regular basis.
• It is strongly recommended to backup your data and settings before updating ASUS Control Center Express.
• For data security reasons, the backup data can only be restored on the original main server and operating system. The backup data cannot be restored if the main server is replaced or if the operating system is reinstalled.

6.3.1 MySQL databases (Windows)

If you have selected MySQL during installation of ASUS Control Center Express, you can use the ACCE DBTool or manually backup and restore your data and settings.

Using the ACCE DBTool to backup, restore, or repair data and settings (recommended):

1. On the main server, go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express, right click on ACCE DBTool, and click on Run as Administrator.

• All data will be deleted during restore, repair, or reinstallation of the MySQL database. It is recommended to create a new backup before initiating these actions.

• Please wait for all actions to be completed before continuing to use ASUS Control Center Express.

• Navigate to the install directory for ASUS Control Center Express in the Open File prompt and select the database file.

The ASUS Control Center Express folder path will vary depending on the path you selected during installation.

1. Set the MySQL communication port if it differs from the default setting.

2. The ACCE DBTool allows you to backup, restore, reinstall, or repair your data. Please refer to the list below for more information:

3. Backup your data: Backs up the current database.

4. Restore from backup: Restores your data from a selected backup file.
5. Reinstall database: Reinstalls the MySQL database.
6. Repair database: Checks the selected backup file for errors and attempts repairs. Data may not be recovered if it is corrupted beyond repair.

Manually backing up data and settings:

1. On the main server, please close and exit ASUS Control Center Express, then go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express and click on Stop ACCE Service.
2. In a command prompt with full Administrator privileges, input the following command to stop the MySQL server:

sc stop DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc stop DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 3 STOP_PENDING
(STOPPABLE, PAUSABLE, ACCEPTS_SHUTDOWN)
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x1
WAIT_HINT : 0x5265c00 

1. Input the following command to confirm if the MySQL server has stopped completely:

sc query DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc query DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 1 STOPPED
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x0
WAIT_HINT : 0x0 

The status of STATE should be 1 STOPPED.

1. Backup the contents of the MySQL data storage directory to your backup location.

C:\Program\Data\DataStorage
Name	Date modified	Type	Size
datastore	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	File folder
tempstore	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	File folder
datastore.setup	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	SETUP File	2 KB
datastore-bin.000001	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	000001 File	1 KB
datastore-bin.000002	3/30/2022 5:18 AM	000002 File	335 KB
datastore-bin.index	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	INDEX File	1 KB

The default data storage directory is set to C:\ProgramData\DataStorage.

1. Once the files are backed up, input the following command in the command prompt to restart the MySQL server.

sc start DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc start DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 2 START_PENDING
(NOT_STOPPABLE, NOT_PAUSABLE, IGNORES_SHUTDOWN)
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x3
WAIT_HINT : 0x3a98
PID : 18652
FLAGS : 

1. Go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express and click on Start ACCE Service.

Manually restoring data and settings:

1. On the main server, please close and exit ASUS Control Center Express, then go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express and click on Stop ACCE Service.

2. In a command prompt with full Administrator privileges, input the following command to stop the MySQL server:

sc stop DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc stop DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 3 STOP_PENDING
(STOPPABLE, PAUSABLE, ACCEPTS_SHUTDOWN)
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x1
WAIT_HINT : 0x5265c00 

1. Input the following command to confirm if the MySQL server has stopped completely:

sc query DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc query DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 1 STOPPED
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x0
WAIT_HINT : 0x0 

The status of STATE should be 1 STOPPED.

1. Copy the backup from your backup location to the MySQL data storage directory and click Replace All.

- The default data storage directory is set to C:\ProgramData\DataStorage.

C:\ProgramData\DataStorage
Name	Date modified	Type	Size
datastore	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	File folder
tempstore	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	File folder
datastore.setup	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	SETUP File	2 KB
datastore-bin.000001	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	000001 File	1 KB
datastore-bin.000002	3/30/2022 5:18 AM	000002 File	335 KB
datastore-bin.index	3/30/2022 2:56 AM	INDEX File	1 KB

1. Once the files are restored, input the following command in the command prompt to restart the MySQL server:

sc start DataStorage

C:\WINDOWS\system32>sc start DataStorage
SERVICE_NAME: DataStorage
TYPE : 10 WIN32_OWN_PROCESS
STATE : 2 START_PENDING
(NOT_STOPPABLE, NOT_PAUSABLE, IGNORES_SHUTDOWN)
WIN32_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
SERVICE_EXIT_CODE : 0 (0x0)
CHECKPOINT : 0x3
WAIT_HINT : 0x3a98
PID : 18652
FLAGS : 

1. Go to Start> ASUS Control Center Express and click on Start ACCE Service.

6.3.2 SQLite databases (Windows)

Backing up data and settings in SQLite databases

If you have selected SQLite during installation of ASUS Control Center Express, please follow the below instructions to back up your data:

1. Locate the folder your ASUS Control Center Express is installed to on your main server.

- The default folder is set to C:\Program Files (x86)\ASUS\ASUS Control Center Express.

- The ASUS Control Center Express folder path will vary depending on the path you selected during installation.

1. Navigate to the apro_console folder.
2. Backup the config folder, including all files in the config folder to your backup location.

apro_console File Home Share View This PC > Local Disk (C:) > Program Files (x80) > ASUS > ASUS Control Center Express > apro_console Search apro_console Name amt AproLog ClientUpdateFile config dash_121 dll installer node_modules scan SoftwareDispatchTextNeededFile sdl upload ACCE Service AccSetup app_icon apro_console apro_list AProConsoleService AproDownloadAgent AproLogServer AproUpdateMonitor asus.cfg ClipConsole Date modified Type File folder 10/7/2020 10:20 AM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 9/28/2020 9:57 AM 8/26/2020 6:38 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8/26/2020 3:40 PM 8 /8 /2020 7:10 PM 8 /8 /2020 3:40 PM 7 /8 /2020 7:10 PM 8 /18 /2020 8:59 PM 7 /11 /2020 9:40 AM 8 /19 /2020 6:59 PM 8 /19 /2020 6:59 PM 8 /19 /2020 6:59 PM 8 /19 /2020 6:57 PM 7 /8 /2020 7:10 PM 8 /18 /2020 6:55 PM File folder File folder File folder File folder File folder Icon Configuration sett... Icon Application Configuration sett... Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application Application

Restoring data and settings in SQLite databases

If you have selected SQLite during installation of ASUS Control Center Express, please follow the below instructions to restore your data. We recommend backing up your current ASUS Control Center Express data and settings before restoring the settings and data of a previous backup. For more details about backing up your ASUS Control Center Express data and settings, please refer to the Backing up data and settings in SQLite databases section.

1. If your ASUS Control Center Express is currently in operation or in use, please close and exit ASUS Control Center Express.
2. On the main server, go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express, and click on Stop ACCE Service.

3D Viewer Alarms & Clock ASUS Control Center Express ASUS Control Center Express.exe Start ACCE Service Stop ACCE Service Calculator Calender Camera Connect Cortana Feedback Hub Get Help Type here to search

1. Locate the backup file (config) you would like to restore and copy it and all the files in the backup folder.

2. Navigate to the folder your ASUS Control Center Express is installed to on your main server, then open the apro_console folder.

- The default folder is set to C:\Program Files (x86)\ASUS\ASUS Control Center Express.

- The ASUS Control Center Express folder path will vary depending on the path you selected during installation.

1. Replace the config folder and all the files in it by pasting the copied config folder and all the files in it from step 3 into the apro_console folder.

2. Once the folder and files have been successfully replaced, go to Start > ASUS Control Center Express, and click on Start ACCE Service.

3D Viewer Alarms & Clock ASUS Control Center Express ASUS Control Center Express.exe Start ACCE Service Stop ACCE Service Calculator Calendar Camera Connect Cortana Feedback Hub Get Help Type here to search

6.3.3 MySQL databases (Linux)

Backing up data and settings in Linux

Follow the below instructions to back up your data and settings.

1. Open a terminal window and run the following command, where is an optional parameter to specify the backup location:

If a backup location is not specified, the backup will be saved to the ACCE installation directory.

sudo ./ACCE --dbbackup <PATH> 

1. Press Y when prompted to restart the ACCE service and proceed with the backup.

Restoring data and settings in Linux

Follow the below instructions to restore from a previously made backup.

1. Open a terminal window and run the following command, where is the full path to the backup file:

All database data will be overwritten. Ensure that your data and settings are backed up before proceeding.

sudo ./ACCE --dbrecovery <PATH> 

1. Press Y when prompted to restart the ACCE service, then press Y again to proceed with the backup

Clearing data and settings in Linux

Follow the below instructions to clear all data and create a fresh database.

1. Open a terminal window and run the following command:

All database data will be deleted. Ensure that your data and settings are backed up before proceeding.

sudo ./ACCE --dbrestore

1. Press Y when prompted to restart the ACCE service, then press Y again to proceed with the backup

Repairing data and settings in Linux

In case of database corruption, follow the below instructions to attempt a repair of the database.

1. Open a terminal window and run the following command:

Depending on the severity of the database corruption, full data recovery may not be guaranteed.

sudo ./ACCE --dbrescure

1. Press Y when prompted to restart the ACCE service and proceed with the database repair.

6.4 Migrating settings from ACC CSM

If you are already using ACC CSM and wish to import all your ACC CSM configurations to ASUS Control Center Express, you can use the Settings Migrator function. This will also allow you to deploy ASUS Control Center Express agents to existing devices managed by your ACC CSM.

To access Settings Migrator, click on 🎨 located at the top right menu bar, then select Settings Migrator.

The screenshots in this section are for reference only.

6.4.1 Migrating configurations of ACC CSM server

You can migrate the ACC CSM server configurations to ASUS Control Center Express by following the steps below:

1. (optional) Check the Enable secure transfer protocol option to ensure the data to be migrated is protected with a safety protocol.

2. Click on Server Setting Migration.

Settings Migrator ■ Enable secure transfer protocol Server Setting Migration Import ACC CSM data OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server IP Address/Host Name Display Client Setting Migration Remove the client device's ACC agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message Add New Security

1. Enter the required information into the fields, then click on Save.

Enter server information ACC CSM server IP 192.168.0.15 ACC CSM account Administrator ACC CSM password **** Sync metadata ✓ Sync general settings ✓ Sync SMTP settings ✓ Sync rule management ✓ Sync account settings ✓ Save Cancel

ACC CSM server IP	IP address of the ACC CSM server you wish to import
ACC CSM account	The administrator account of the ACC CSM server you wish to import
ACC CSM password	The password for the administrator account of the ACC CSM server you wish to import
Sync metadata	Check to import metadata fields of ACC CSM
Sync general setting	Check to import specific general settings of ACC CSM. These settings include:MainServer Settings Agent Configuration- Web page refresh timer - Hardware sensor interval- Check for updates timer - Utilization time interval- Agent response timer
Sync SMTP setting	Check to import the SMTP settings of ACC CSM
Sync rule management	Check to import notification rules of ACC CSM* Imported notification rules will only be applied to ACC CSM devices managed by ASUS Control Center Express.** If newly deployed CSM devices are added after you have already migrated server configurations, please use the Setting Migrator again after the deployment to synchronize the configurations.
Sync account setting	Check to import the accounts and roles of ACC CSM* The default account for ACC CSM cannot be imported.** Due to security reasons, the passwords for imported ACC CSM accounts will not be imported to ASUS Control Center Express. The password for these accounts will be set to “admin”. Ensure that the passwords for these accounts are changed after importing.

Migrated CSM product license keys will be migrated to the CSM License Information list under the License tab in ASUS Control Center Express. Refer to the License information section in this chapter for more information.

1. The results of the configuration and data migration may differ according to the ACC CSM's configurations. You can view the migration results for each option in the mission center.

Server Setting Migration Capability | Task Status | Message syncLicense Success syncMetaData Fail No deployed device exist syncGeneralSetting Success syncSMTP Fail ACC CSM SMTP data is empty or in syncRule Fail No deployed device exist syncAccount Success

6.4.2 Importing ACC CSM data

You can import the client device information of ACC CSM which will allow you to deploy ASUS Control Center Express agents to the ACC CSM client devices.

1. Click on Import ACC CSM data.

Settings Migrator Enable secure transfer protocol Server Setting Migration Import ACC CSM data OS type Host Type IP Address/Host Name Account Type Account Password Main Server my Host Subset Deploy Client Setting Migration Remove the client device's ACC agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message

2. Enter the required information into the fields.

Enter server information ACC Express server IP 192.168.2.103 ACC CSM server IP 192.168.2.101 ACC CSM account Administrator ACC CSM password ------------------------ Save Cancel

ACC Express server IP	IP address of ASUS Control Center Express server
ACC CSM server IP	IP address of the ACC CSM server you wish to import
ACC CSM account	The administrator account of the ACC CSM server you wish to import
ACC CSM password	The password for the administrator account of the ACC CSM server you wish to import

3. Click on Save when you are finished to begin importing the data of the client devices.

1. The data of client devices managed by ACC CSM should be imported and appear in the devices block.

If an imported client device has already been deployed with an ASUS Control Center Express agent, This device has already been deployed to will be displayed. If you wish to redeploy to this device, please remove the agent first, refer to the Removing agents section in the Agent Deployment chapter for more information.

6.4.3 Deploying ACCE agents to ACC CSM devices

1. Before deploying ASUS Control Center Express agents to ACC CSM devices, please ensure you have registered CSM license keys for ACC CSM product devices.

For more information on registering CSM license keys, refer to the License section in this chapter.

1. Double click on the imported client devices you wish to deploy agents to and change the password to the administrator password of the client device, then click on Save. You can also edit the default Agent device's administrator account and password, under Settings > Options > General Configurations > Agent device's administrator account. Refer to the Agent account password section in this chapter for more information.

2. Check the devices you wish to deploy an agent to in the imported devices list.

Settings Migrator Enable secure transfer protocol Server Setting Migration Import ACC CSM data OS Type Host Type IP Address... Acc... Account Past... Main Set... C1... R... D... Cata... Windows ip 162.164.2.152 mineral Administrator:xlin 162.164.2.152 close 10007 00:00 user IP Address/Host Name Result Message Display Client Setting Migration Remove the client device's ACC agent OS type IP Address/Host Name Result Message IP Address/Host Name Result Message

1. (optional) Check Client setting migration to import the ACC CSM client settings and data for the selected devices when you deploy, this option is checked by default. Please refer to the table below for more information on the client settings and data Client setting migration will import.

Utilization	CPU threshold values
	DIMM threshold values
	Partition threshold values
	Network threshold values
Control	Enable/Disable Regedit setting
	USB Storage Device setting
Event log	Event log information on the device
Scheduled tasks	Power Control related scheduled tasks
	Service Control related scheduled tasks
	Software Dispatch related scheduled tasks
	Security Control related scheduled tasks
	BIOS Cache related scheduled tasks

1. (optional) Check Remove the client device's ACC agent to remove any previous versions of ASUS Control Center agents installed on the selected client devices when deploying new agents.
2. Click on Deploy and wait for the agent deployment to be completed. The results of the deployment may differ according to the ACC CSM's configurations. You can view the deployment and data migration results for each device in the result block.

Deploy Client Setting Migration Remove the traditional software Acc OS Type | IP Address/Host ... | Result | Message | Windows 192.168.0.15 Successfully deployed Event Log: ACC CSM event log is empty; Task Scheduler: ACC CSM task schedule data is empty;

Ensure a Windows operating system Administrator account of the client is enabled and has a password set.

If there are imported Scheduled tasks on devices which do not have ASUS Control Center Express agents deployed yet, tasks relating to these devices will be added to the Task Scheduler once ASUS Control Center Express agents have been deployed to these devices.